Toshiba Laptop TECRA R10 User Manual
User’s Manual  
TECRA R10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TECRA R10  
Underside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
Front with the display open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8  
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11  
Optical disc drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13  
AC adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15  
Chapter 3 Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1  
Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6  
TOSHIBA Value Added Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9  
Utilities and Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11  
Optional devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16  
Optional accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32  
Chapter 4 Operating Basics  
Using the Touch Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
Using the Fingerprint Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
Web Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9  
Using the TOSHIBA Face Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10  
Using optical disc drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13  
Writing CD/DVDs on DVD Super Multi drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17  
TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23  
Media care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24  
Sound System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25  
Wireless communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28  
LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31  
Computer Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33  
Using the Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34  
Using the TOSHIBA USB Sleep and Charge Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36  
Heat dispersal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38  
Chapter 5 The Keyboard  
Typewriter keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1  
Function keys: F1 … F12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Soft keys: FN key combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Hot keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
Windows special keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5  
Keypad overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6  
Generating ASCII characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Chapter 6 Power and Power-Up Modes  
Power conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1  
Monitoring of power condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5  
TOSHIBA Password Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14  
Power-up modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17  
Panel power on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iii  
TECRA R10  
System automatic Sleep/Hibernation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18  
Chapter 7 HW Setup  
Accessing HW Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1  
HW Setup window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1  
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting  
Problem solving process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1  
Hardware and system checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3  
Using Windows XP Mode on your Windows 7 computer (available on  
certain models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22  
TOSHIBA support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22  
Appendix A Specifications  
Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
Appendix B Display Controller and Video mode  
Display controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1  
Video mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1  
Appendix C Wireless LAN  
Card Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1  
Radio Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2  
Supported Frequency Sub-bands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3  
Appendix D Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability  
Bluetooth wireless technology and your Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2  
Regulatory statements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2  
Using Bluetooth Adaptor from TOSHIBA equipment in Japan . . . . D-4  
Appendix E AC Power Cord and Connectors  
Certification agencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1  
Appendix F TOSHIBA Anti-theft Protection Timer  
Appendix G TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor  
Starting the TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2  
If a TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor message is displayed. . . . . . . . . . G-2  
Cleaning the cooling module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3  
Appendix H Legal Footnotes  
Non-applicable Icons*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1  
CPU*2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1  
Memory (Main System)*3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-2  
Battery Life*4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3  
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity*5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3  
LCD*6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3  
Graphics Processor Unit ("GPU")*7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3  
Wireless LAN*8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-4  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iv  
TECRA R10  
USB Sleep and Charge*9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-4  
Copy Protection*10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-4  
Glossary  
Index  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
TECRA R10  
Copyright  
© 2009 by TOSHIBA Corporation. All rights reserved. Under the copyright  
laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without the prior  
written permission of TOSHIBA. No patent liability is assumed, with respect  
to the use of the information contained herein.  
TOSHIBA TECRA R10 Portable Personal Computer User’s Manual  
First edition September 2009  
Copyright authority for music, movies, computer programs, databases and  
other intellectual property covered by copyright laws belongs to the author  
or to the copyright owner. Copyrighted material can be reproduced only for  
personal use or use within the home. Any other use beyond that stipulated  
above (including conversion to digital format, alteration, transfer of copied  
material and distribution on a network) without the permission of the  
copyright owner is a violation of copyright or author's rights and is subject to  
civil damages or criminal action. Please comply with copyright laws in  
making any reproduction from this manual.  
Disclaimer  
This manual has been validated and reviewed for accuracy. The  
instructions and descriptions it contains are accurate for the TOSHIBA  
TECRA R10 Portable Personal Computer at the time of this manual’s  
production. However, succeeding computers and manuals are subject to  
change without notice. TOSHIBA assumes no liability for damages incurred  
directly or indirectly from errors, omissions or discrepancies between the  
computer and the manual.  
Trademarks  
IBM is a registered trademark and IBM PC is a trademark of International  
Business Machines Corporation.  
Intel, Intel SpeedStep, Intel Core and Centrino are trademarks or registered  
trademarks of Intel Corporation.  
Windows, Microsoft and Windows logo are registered trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation.  
Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by TOSHIBA  
under license.  
Photo CD is a trademark of Eastman Kodak Company.  
ExpressCard is a trademark of PCMCIA.  
ConfigFree is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation.  
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.  
Secure Digital and SD are trademarks of SD Card Association.  
Other trademarks and registered trademarks not listed above may be used  
in this manual.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vi  
     
TECRA R10  
FCC information  
FCC notice "Declaration of Conformity Information"  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a  
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits  
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference  
in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate  
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the  
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.  
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a  
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to  
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the  
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the  
interference by one or more of the following measures:  
■ Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
■ Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
■ Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to  
which the receiver is connected.  
■ Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
Only peripherals complying with the FCC class B limits may be attached to  
this equipment. Operation with non-compliant peripherals or peripherals  
not recommended by TOSHIBA is likely to result in interference to radio  
and TV reception. Shielded cables must be used between the external  
devices and the computer’s external monitor port, Universal Serial Bus  
(USB 2.0) ports, eSATA/USB combo port and microphone jack. Changes  
or modifications made to this equipment, not expressly approved by  
TOSHIBA or parties authorized by TOSHIBA could void the user’s  
authority to operate the equipment.  
FCC conditions  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to  
the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Contact  
Address:  
TOSHIBA America Information Systems, Inc.  
9740 Irvine Boulevard  
Irvine, California 92618-1697  
Telephone: (949) 583-3000  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vii  
 
TECRA R10  
EU Conformity Statement  
This product and - if applicable - the supplied accessories too are marked  
with "CE" and comply therefore with the applicable harmonized European  
standards listed under the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, the EMC  
Directive 2004/108/EC and/or R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC.  
Responsible for CE-  
marking:  
TOSHIBA EUROPE GMBH, Hammfelddamm 8,  
41460 Neuss, Germany.  
Manufacturer:  
Toshiba Corporation, 1-1 Shibaura 1-chome,  
Minato-ku, Tokyo, 105-8001, Japan  
The complete official EU CE Declaration can be obtained on following  
internet page:  
http://epps.toshiba-teg.com/  
VCCI Class B Information  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
viii  
   
TECRA R10  
Following information is only valid for EU-member States:  
Disposal of products  
The crossed out wheeled dust bin symbol indicates that products must be  
collected and disposed of separately from household waste. Integrated  
batteries and accumulators can be disposed of with the product. They will  
be separated at the recycling centres.  
The black bar indicates that the product was placed on the market after  
August 13, 2005.  
By participating in separate collection of products and batteries, you will  
help to assure the proper disposal of products and batteries and thus help  
to prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and  
human health.  
For more detailed information about the collection and recycling  
programmes available in your country, please visit our website  
(http://eu.computers.toshiba-europe.com) or contact your local city office or  
the shop where you purchased the product.  
Disposal of batteries and/or accumulators  
The crossed out wheeled dust bin symbol indicates that batteries and/or  
accumulators must be collected and disposed of separately from  
household waste.  
If the battery or accumulator contains more than the specified values of  
lead (Pb), mercury (Hg), and/or cadmium (Cd) defined in the Battery  
Directive (2006/66/EC), then the chemical symbols for lead (Pb), mercury  
(Hg) and/or cadmium (Cd) will appear below the crossed out wheeled dust  
bin symbol.  
By participating in separate collection of batteries, you will help to assure  
the proper disposal of products and batteries and thus help to prevent  
potential negative consequences for the environment and human health.  
For more detailed information about the collection and recycling  
programmes available in your country, please visit our website  
(http://eu.computers.toshiba-europe.com) or contact your local city office or  
the shop where you purchased the product.  
These symbols may not stick depending on the country and region where  
you purchased.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ix  
 
TECRA R10  
Disposing of the computer and the computer's batteries  
■ Discard this computer in accordance with applicable laws and  
regulations. For further information, contact your local government.  
■ This computer contains rechargeable batteries. After repeated use, the  
batteries will finally lose their ability to hold a charge and you will need  
to replace them. Under certain applicable laws and regulation, it may be  
illegal to dispose of old batteries by placing them in the trash.  
■ Please be kind to our shared environment. Check with your local  
government authority for details regarding where to recycle old batteries  
or how to dispose of them properly.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
x
 
TECRA R10  
Optical disc drive safety instructions  
Be sure to check the international precautions at the end of this section.  
Panasonic Communications  
DVD Super Multi with Double Layer Recording UJ862  
■ The DVD Super Multi drive model employs a laser system. To ensure  
proper use of this product, please read this instruction manual carefully  
and retain for future reference. Should the unit ever require  
maintenance, contact an authorized service location.  
■ Use of controls, adjustments or the performance of procedures other  
than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
■ To prevent direct exposure to the laser beam, do not try to open the  
enclosure.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xi  
 
TECRA R10  
International precautions  
CAUTION: This appliance contains a  
laser system and is classified as a  
“CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT.” To use  
this model properly, read the instruction  
manual carefully and keep this manual  
for your future reference. In case of any  
trouble with this model, please contact  
your nearest “AUTHORIZED service  
station.” To prevent direct exposure to the  
laser beam, do not try to open the  
enclosure.  
VORSICHT: Dieses Gerät enthält ein  
Laser-System und ist als  
“LASERSCHUTZKLASSE 1 PRODUKT”  
klassifiziert. Für den richtigen Gebrauch  
dieses Modells lesen Sie bitte die  
Bedienungsanleitung sorgfältig durch  
und bewahren diese bitte als Referenz  
auf. Falls Probleme mit diesem Modell  
auftreten, benachrichtigen Sie bitte die  
nächste “autorisierte Service-Vertretung”.  
Um einen direkten Kontakt mit dem  
Laserstrahl zu vermeiden darf das Gerät  
nicht geöffnet werden.  
ADVARSEL: Denne mærking er anbragt  
udvendigt på apparatet og indikerer, at  
apparatet arbejder med laserstråler af  
klasse 1, hviket betyder, at der anvendes  
laserstrlier af svageste klasse, og at man  
ikke på apparatets yderside kan bilve  
udsat for utilladellg kraftig stråling.  
APPARATET BOR KUN ÅBNES AF  
FAGFOLK MED SÆRLIGT KENDSKAB  
TIL APPARATER MED  
LASERSTRÅLER!  
Indvendigt i apparatet er anbragt den her  
gengivne advarselsmækning, som  
advarer imod at foretage sådanne  
indgreb i apparatet, at man kan komme til  
at udsatte sig for laserstråling.  
User’s Manual  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TECRA R10  
OBS! Apparaten innehåller  
laserkomponent som avger laserstråining  
överstigande gränsen för laserklass 1.  
VAROITUS. Suojakoteloa si saa avata.  
Laite sisältää laserdiodin, joka lähetää  
näkymätöntä silmilie vaarallista  
lasersäteilyä.  
CAUTION: USE OF CONTROLS OR  
ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE  
OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN  
THOSE SPECIFIED IN THE OWNER’S  
MANUAL MAY RESULT IN  
HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.  
VORSICHT: DIE VERWENDUNG VON  
ANDEREN STEURUNGEN ODER  
EINSTELLUNGEN ODER DAS  
DURCHFÜHREN VON ANDEREN  
VORGÄNGEN ALS IN DER  
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG  
BESCHRIEBEN KÖNNEN  
GEFÄHRLICHE  
STRAHLENEXPOSITIONEN ZUR  
FOLGE HABEN.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xiii  
Preface  
Congratulations on your purchase of the TECRA R10 computer. This  
powerful notebook computer provides excellent expansion capability,  
includes multimedia functionality, and is designed to provide years of  
reliable, high-performance computing.  
This manual tells how to set up and begin using your TECRA R10  
computer. It also provides detailed information on configuring your  
computer, basic operations and care, using optional devices and  
troubleshooting.  
If you are a new user of computers or if you’re new to portable computing,  
first read over the Chapter 1, Getting Started and Chapter 3, Hardware,  
Utilities and Options chapters to familiarize yourself with the computer’s  
features, components and accessory devices. Then read Chapter 1,  
Getting Started for step-by-step instructions on setting up your computer.  
If you are an experienced computer user, please continue reading the  
preface to learn how this manual is organized, then become acquainted  
with this manual by browsing through its pages. Be sure to read the Special  
features section in Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options to learn  
about features that are uncommon or unique to this computer, as well as  
the section on Chapter 7, HW Setup, to understand how to setup and  
configure these features.  
Read Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options if connecting optional  
products or external devices.  
Conventions  
This manual uses the following formats to describe, identify, and highlight  
terms and operating procedures.  
Abbreviations  
On first appearance, and whenever necessary for clarity, abbreviations are  
enclosed in parentheses following their definition. For example: Read Only  
Memory (ROM). Acronyms are also defined in the Glossary.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xiv  
   
TECRA R10  
Icons  
Keys  
Icons identify ports, dials, and other parts of your computer. The indicator  
panel also uses icons to identify the components it is providing information  
on.  
The keyboard keys are used in the text to describe many computer  
operations. A distinctive typeface identifies the key top symbols as they  
appear on the keyboard. For example, ENTER identifies the ENTER key.  
Key operation  
Some operations require you to simultaneously use two or more keys. We  
identify such operations by the key top symbols separated by a plus sign  
(+). For example, CTRL + C means you must hold down CTRL and at the  
same time press C. If three keys are used, hold down the first two and at  
the same time press the third.  
When procedures require an action such as  
ABC  
clicking an icon or entering text, the icon's name  
or the text you are to type in is represented in the  
typeface you see to the left.  
Display  
Names of windows or icons or text generated by  
the computer that appear on its display screen  
are presented in the type face you see to the left.  
S
ABC  
Messages  
Messages are used in this manual to bring important information to your  
attention. Each type of message is identified as shown below.  
Pay attention! A caution informs you that improper use of equipment or  
failure to follow instructions may cause data loss or damage your  
equipment.  
Please read. A note is a hint or advice that helps you make best use of  
your equipment.  
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which could result in death or  
serious injury, if you do not follow instructions.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xv  
TECRA R10  
Terminology  
This term is defined in this document as follows:  
Start  
The word "Start" refers to the "  
Windows 7.  
" button in  
HDD or Hard disk  
drive  
Some models are equipped with a "Solid State  
Drive (SSD)" instead of a hard disk drive.  
In this manual, the word "HDD" or "Hard disk  
drive" also refers to the SSD unless otherwise  
stated.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xvi  
General Precautions  
TOSHIBA computers are designed to optimize safety, minimize strain and  
withstand the rigors of portability. However, certain precautions should be  
observed to further reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the  
computer.  
Be certain to read the general precautions below and to note the cautions  
included in the text of the manual.  
Provide adequate ventilation  
■ Always make sure your computer and AC adaptor have adequate  
ventilation and are protected from overheating when the power is  
turned on or when an AC adaptor is connected to a power outlet (even if  
your computer is in Sleep Mode). In this condition, observe the  
following:  
■ Never cover your computer or AC adaptor with any object.  
■ Never place your computer or AC adaptor near a heat source, such  
as anelectric blanket or heater.  
■ Never cover or block the air vents including those located at the  
base of the computer.  
■ Always operate your computer on a hard flat surface. Using your  
computer on a carpet or other soft material can block the vents.  
■ Always provide sufficient space around the computer.  
■ Overheating your computer or AC adaptor could cause system failure,  
computer or AC adaptor damage or a fire, possibly resulting in serious  
injury.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xvii  
   
TECRA R10  
Creating a computer-friendly environment  
Place the computer on a flat surface that is large enough for the computer  
and any other items you are using, such as a printer.  
Leave enough space around the computer and other equipment to provide  
adequate ventilation. Otherwise, they may overheat.  
To keep your computer in prime operating condition, protect your work area  
from:  
■ Dust, moisture, and direct sunlight.  
■ Equipment that generates a strong electromagnetic field, such as  
stereo speakers (other than speakers that are connected to the  
computer) or speakerphones.  
■ Rapid changes in temperature or humidity and sources of temperature  
change such as air conditioner vents or heaters.  
■ Extreme heat, cold, or humidity.  
■ Liquids and corrosive chemicals.  
Stress injury  
Carefully read the Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort. It contains  
information on the prevention of stress injuries to your hands and wrists  
that can be caused by extensive keyboard use. Instruction Manual for  
Safety and Comfort also includes information on work space design,  
posture and lighting that can help reduce physical stress.  
Heat injury  
■ Avoid prolonged physical contact with the computer. If the computer is  
used for long periods, its surface can become very warm. While the  
temperature will not feel hot to the touch, if you maintain physical  
contact with the computer for a long time, for example if you rest the  
computer on your lap or if you keep your hands on the palm rest, your  
skin might suffer a low-heat injury.  
■ If the computer has been used for a long time, avoid direct contact with  
the metal plate supporting the various interface ports as this can  
become hot.  
■ The surface of the AC adaptor can become hot when in use but this  
condition does not indicate a malfunction. If you need to transport the  
AC adaptor, you should disconnect it and let it cool before moving it.  
■ Do not lay the AC adaptor on a material that is sensitive to heat as the  
material could become damaged.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xviii  
     
TECRA R10  
Pressure or impact damage  
Do not apply heavy pressure to the computer or subject it to any form of  
strong impact as this can damage the computer's components or otherwise  
cause it to malfunction.  
Mobile phones  
Please be aware that the use of mobile phones can interfere with the audio  
system. The operation of the computer will not be impaired in any way, but  
it is recommended that a minimum distance of 30cm is maintained between  
the computer and a mobile phone that is in use.  
Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort  
All important information on the safe and proper use of this computer is  
described in the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort. Be  
sure to read it before using the computer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xix  
     
Chapter 1  
Getting Started  
This chapter provides an equipment checklist, and basic information to start  
using your computer.  
Some of the features described in this manual may not function properly if  
you use an operating system that was not pre-installed by TOSHIBA.  
Equipment checklist  
Carefully unpack your computer, taking care to save the box and packaging  
materials for future use.  
Hardware  
Check to make sure you have all the following items:  
■ TECRA R10 Portable Personal Computer  
■ AC adaptor and power cord (2-pin plug or 3-pin plug)  
■ Battery pack  
Documentation  
■ TECRA R10 User Information Guide  
■ Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort  
■ End User License Agreement  
If any of the items are missing or damaged, contact your dealer  
immediately.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1  
         
Getting Started  
Software  
The following Windows® operating system and utility software are pre-  
installed.  
■ Windows 7  
■ TOSHIBA Value Added Package  
■ Recovery Media Creator  
■ TOSHIBA DVD Player  
■ TOSHIBA SD Memory Utilities  
■ TOSHIBA SD Memory Boot Utility  
■ TOSHIBA Assist  
■ TOSHIBA ConfigFree™  
■ TOSHIBA HDD Protection (Is preinstalled in some models)  
■ TOSHIBA Disc Creator  
■ TOSHIBA eco Utility  
■ TOSHIBA Face Recognition (Is preinstalled in some models)  
■ TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor  
■ TOSHIBA USB Sleep and Charge Utility  
■ TOSHIBA Fingerprint Utility (Is preinstalled in some models)  
■ Online Manual  
■ TECRA R10 User's Manual (This manual)  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-2  
Getting Started  
Getting Started  
■ All users should be sure to read the section Starting up for the first time.  
■ Be sure to read the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort  
for information on the safe and proper use of this computer. It is  
intended to help you be more comfortable and productive while using a  
notebook computer. By following the recommendations in it you may  
reduce your chance of developing a painful or disabling injury to your  
hand, arms, shoulders or neck.  
This section provides basic information to start using your computer. It  
covers the following topics:  
■ Connecting the AC adaptor  
■ Opening the display  
■ Turning on the power  
■ Starting up for the first time  
■ Turning off the power  
■ Restarting the computer  
■ System Recovery Options  
■ Creating Recovery Media  
■ Restoring the pre-installed software from the Recovery hard disk drive  
■ Restoring the pre-installed software from your created Recovery Media  
■ Use a virus-check program and make sure it is updated regularly.  
■ Never format storage media without checking its content - formatting  
destroys all stored data.  
■ It is a good idea to periodically back up the internal hard disk drive or  
other main storage device to external media. General storage media is  
not durable or stable over long periods of time and under certain  
conditions may result in data loss.  
■ Before you install a device or application, save any data in memory to  
the hard disk drive or other storage media. Failure to do so may result  
in the loss of data.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-3  
   
Getting Started  
Connecting the AC adaptor  
Attach the AC adaptor when you need to charge the battery or you want to  
operate from AC power. It is also the fastest way to get started, because  
the battery pack will need to be charged before you can operate from  
battery power.  
The AC adaptor can be connected to any power source supplying from 100  
to 240 volts and 50 or 60 hertz. For details on using the AC adaptor to  
charge the battery pack, refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes.  
■ Always use the TOSHIBA AC adaptor that was included with your  
computer, or use AC adaptors specified by TOSHIBA to avoid any risk  
of fire or other damage to the computer. Use of an incompatible AC  
adaptor could cause fire or damage to the computer possibly resulting  
in serious injury. TOSHIBA assumes no liability for any damage caused  
by use of an incompatible adaptor.  
■ Never plug the AC adaptor into a power source that does not  
correspond to both the voltage and the frequency specified on the  
regulatory label of the unit. Failure to do so could result in a fire or  
electric shock, possibly resulting in serious injury.  
■ Always use or purchase power cables that comply with the legal  
voltage and frequency specifications and requirements in the country of  
use. Failure to do so could result in a fire or electric shock, possibly  
resulting in serious injury.  
■ The supplied power cord conforms to safety rules and regulations in  
the region the product is bought and should not be used outside this  
region. For use in other regions, please buy power cords that conform  
to safety rules and regulations in the particular region.  
■ Do not use a 3-pin to 2-pin conversion plug.  
■ When you connect the AC adaptor to the computer, always follow the  
steps in the exact order as described in the User’s Manual. Connecting  
the power cable to a live electrical outlet should be the last step  
otherwise the adaptor DC output plug could hold an electrical charge  
and cause an electrical shock or minor bodily injury when touched. As  
a general safety precaution, avoid touching any metal parts.  
■ Never place your computer or AC adaptor on a wooden surface,  
furniture, or any other surface that could be marred by exposure to heat  
since the computer base and AC adaptor's surface increase in  
temperature during normal use.  
■ Always place your computer or AC adaptor on a flat and hard surface  
that is resistant to heat damage.  
Refer to the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort for  
detailed precautions and handling instructions.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-4  
 
Getting Started  
1. Connect the power cord to the AC adaptor.  
Figure 1-1 Connecting the power cord to the AC adaptor (2-pin plug)  
Figure 1-2 Connecting the power cord to the AC adaptor (3-pin plug)  
Either a 2-pin or 3-pin adaptor/cord will be included with the computer  
depending on the model.  
2. Connect the AC adaptor’s DC output plug to the DC IN 15V jack on the  
right side of the computer.  
DC IN 15V jack  
DC output plug  
Figure 1-3 Connecting the DC output plug to the computer  
3. Plug the power cord into a live wall outlet - the Battery and DC IN  
indicators on the front of the computer should glow.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-5  
Getting Started  
Opening the display  
The display panel can be opened to a wide range of angles for optimal  
viewing.  
While holding down the palm rest with one hand so that the main body of  
the computer is not raised, slowly lift the display panel - this will allow the  
angle of the display panel to be adjusted to provide optimum clarity.  
Display panel  
Figure 1-4 Opening the display panel  
Use reasonable care when opening and closing the display panel. Opening  
it vigorously or slamming it shut could damage the computer.  
■ Be careful not to open the display panel too far as this could put stress  
on the display panel’s hinges and cause damage.  
■ Do not press or push on the display panel.  
■ Do not lift the computer by the display panel.  
■ Do not close the display panel with pens or any other objects left in  
between the display panel and the keyboard.  
■ When opening or closing the display panel, place one hand on the  
palm rest to hold the computer in place and use the other hand to  
slowly open or close the display panel (Do not use excessive force  
when opening or closing the display panel).  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-6  
 
Getting Started  
Turning on the power  
This section describes how to turn on the power - the Power indicator will  
then indicate the status. Please refer to the Monitoring of power condition  
section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes for more information.  
■ After you turn on the power for the first time, do not turn it off until you  
have set up the operating system. Please refer to the section Starting  
up for the first time for more information.  
■ Volume cannot be adjusted during Windows Setup.  
1. Open the display panel.  
2. Press and hold the computer's power button for two or three seconds.  
Power button  
Figure 1-5 Turning on the power  
Starting up for the first time  
The Windows 7 Startup Screen will be the first screen displayed when you  
turn on the power. Follow the on-screen instructions on each screen in  
order to properly install the operating system.  
When it is displayed, be sure to read the Software License Terms  
carefully.  
Turning off the power  
The power can be turned off in one of three modes, either Shut Down  
Mode, Hibernation Mode or Sleep Mode.  
Shut Down Mode  
When you turn off the power in Shut Down Mode no data will be saved and  
the computer will boot to the operating system's main screen the next time  
it is turned on.  
1. If you have entered data, either save it to the hard disk drive or to other  
storage media.  
2. Make sure all disk/disc activity has stopped before removing the  
CD/DVD or floppy diskette.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-7  
           
Getting Started  
■ Make sure the Hard Disk Drive indicator is off. If you turn off the power  
while a disk (disc) is being accessed, you may lose data or damage the  
disk.  
■ Never turn off the power while an application is running. Doing so could  
cause loss of data.  
■ Never turn off the power, disconnect an external storage device or  
remove storage media during data read/write. Doing so can cause data  
loss.  
3. Click Start.  
4. Click the Shut down button (  
).  
5. Turn off any peripheral devices connected to your computer.  
Do not turn the computer or peripheral devices back on immediately - wait  
a short period to avoid any potential damage.  
Sleep Mode  
If you have to interrupt your work, you are able to turn off the power without  
exiting from your software by placing the computer into Sleep Mode. In this  
mode data is maintained in the computer's main memory so that when you  
turn on the power again, you can continue working right where you left off.  
When you have to turn off your computer aboard an aircraft or in places  
where electronic devices are regulated or controlled, always completely  
shut down the computer. This includes turning off any wireless  
communication switches or devices, and canceling settings that reactivate  
the computer automatically, such as a timer recording function. Failure to  
completely shut down the computer in this way could allow the operating  
system to reactivate and run pre-programmed tasks or preserve unsaved  
data, which could interfere with aviation or other systems, possibly causing  
serious injury.  
■ Before entering Sleep Mode, be sure to save your data.  
■ Do not install or remove a memory module while the computer is in  
Sleep Mode. The computer or the memory module could be damaged.  
■ Do not remove the battery pack while the computer is in Sleep Mode  
(unless the computer is connected to an AC power source). Data in  
memory could be lost.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-8  
   
Getting Started  
■ When the AC adaptor is connected, the computer will go into Sleep  
Mode according to the settings in the Power Options (to access it, Start  
-> Control Panel -> System and Security -> Power Options).  
■ To restore the operation of the computer from Sleep Mode, press and  
hold the power button or any key on the keyboard for a short amount of  
time. Please note that keyboard keys can only be used if the Wake-up  
on Keyboard option is enabled within the HW Setup utility.  
■ If the computer enters Sleep Mode while a network application is  
active, the application might not be restored when the computer is next  
turned on and the system returns from Sleep Mode.  
■ To prevent the computer from automatically entering Sleep Mode,  
disable Sleep Mode within the Power Options (to access it, Start ->  
Control Panel -> System and Security -> Power Options).  
■ To use the Hybrid Sleep function, configure it in the Power Options.  
Benefits of Sleep Mode  
The Sleep Mode feature provides the following benefits:  
■ Restores the previous working environment more rapidly than does the  
Hibernation Mode feature.  
■ Saves power by shutting down the system when the computer receives  
no input or hardware access for the time period set by the System  
Sleep Mode feature.  
■ Allows the use of the panel power off feature.  
Executing Sleep Mode  
You can also enable Sleep Mode by pressing FN + F3 - please refer to  
Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for further details.  
You can enter Sleep Mode in one of three ways:  
■ Click Start, point to the arrow icon (  
) and select Sleep  
from the menu.  
■ Close the display panel. Please note that this feature must be enabled  
within the Power Options (to access it, click Start -> Control Panel  
-> System and Security -> Power Options).  
■ Press the power button. Please note that this feature must be enabled  
within the Power Options (to access it, click Start -> Control Panel  
-> System and Security -> Power Options).  
When you turn the power back on, you can continue where you left when  
you shut down the computer.  
■ When the computer is in Sleep Mode, the power indicator will blink  
orange.  
■ If you are operating the computer on battery power, you can lengthen  
the overall operating time by turning it off into Hibernation Mode - Sleep  
Mode will consume more power while the computer is off.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-9  
Getting Started  
Sleep Mode limitations  
Sleep Mode will not function under the following conditions:  
■ Power is turned back on immediately after shutting down.  
■ Memory circuits are exposed to static electricity or electrical noise.  
Hibernation Mode  
The Hibernation Mode feature saves the contents of memory to the hard  
disk drive when the computer is turned off so that, the next time it is turned  
on, the previous state is restored. Please note that the Hibernation Mode  
feature does not save the status of any peripheral devices connected to the  
computer.  
■ Save your data. While entering Hibernation Mode, the computer saves  
the contents of memory to the hard disk drive. However, for safety  
sake, it is best to save your data manually.  
■ Data will be lost if you remove the battery or disconnect the AC adaptor  
before the save is completed. Wait for the Hard Disk Drive indicator to  
go out.  
■ Do not install or remove a memory module while the computer is in  
Hibernation Mode. Data will be lost.  
Benefits of Hibernation Mode  
The Hibernation Mode feature provides the following benefits:  
■ Saves data to the hard disk drive when the computer automatically  
shuts down because of a low battery condition.  
■ You can return to your previous working environment immediately when  
you turn on the computer.  
■ Saves power by shutting down the system when the computer receives  
no input or hardware access for the time period set by the System  
Hibernate feature.  
■ Allows the use of the panel power off feature.  
Starting Hibernation Mode  
You can also enable Hibernation Mode by pressing FN + F4 - please refer  
to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for further details.  
To enter Hibernation Mode, follow the steps below.  
1. Click Start.  
2. Point to the arrow icon (  
from the menu.  
) and then select Hibernate  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-10  
 
Getting Started  
Automatic Hibernation Mode  
The computer can be configured to enter Hibernation Mode automatically  
when you press the power button or close the lid. In order to define these  
settings, you can follow the steps as described below:  
1. Click Start and click the Control Panel.  
2. Click System and Security and click Power Options.  
3. Click Choose what the power button does or Choose what closing  
the lid does.  
4. Enable the desired Hibernation Mode settings for When I press the  
power button and When I close the lid.  
5. Click the Save changes button.  
Data save in Hibernation Mode  
When you turn off the power in Hibernation Mode, the computer will take a  
moment to save the current data in memory to the hard disk drive. During  
this time, the Hard Disk Drive indicator will glow.  
After you turn off the computer, and the content of memory has been saved  
to the hard disk drive, turn off the power to any peripheral devices.  
Do not turn the computer or devices back on immediately. Wait a moment  
to let all capacitors fully discharge.  
Restarting the computer  
Certain conditions require that you reset the computer, for example if:  
■ You change certain computer settings.  
■ An error occurs and the computer does not respond to your keyboard  
commands.  
If you need to restart the computer, there are three ways this can be  
achieved:  
■ Click Start, point to the arrow icon (  
) and then select  
Restartfrom the menu.  
■ Press CTRL, ALT and DEL simultaneously (once) to display the menu  
window, then select Restart from the Shut down options.  
■ Press the power button and hold it down for five seconds. Once the  
computer has turned itself off, wait between ten and fifteen seconds  
before turning the power on again by pressing the power button.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-11  
 
Getting Started  
System Recovery Options  
There is a hidden partition allocated on the hard disk drive for the System  
Recovery Options.  
This partition stores files which can be used to repair the system in the  
event of a problem.  
The System Recovery Options feature will be unusable if this partition is  
deleted.  
System Recovery Options  
The System Recovery Options feature is installed on the hard disk when  
shipped from the factory. The System Recovery Options menu includes  
tools to repair startup problems, run diagnostics or restore the system.  
See the Windows Help and Support content for more information about  
Startup Repair.  
The System Recovery Options can also be run manually to repair  
problems.  
The procedure is as follows. Follow the instructions shown on the on-  
screen menu.  
1. Turn off the computer.  
2. While holding the F8 key, turn on the computer.  
3. The Advanced Boot Options menu will be displayed.  
Use the arrow keys to select Repair Your Computer and press  
ENTER.  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
®
Check your Windows manual for more information on backing up your  
system (including the system image backup feature).  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-12  
 
Getting Started  
System Recovery  
This section describes the creation of Recovery Media and their use.  
Creating Recovery Media  
This section describes how to create Recovery Media.  
■ Be sure to connect the AC adaptor when you create Recovery Media.  
■ Be sure to close all other software programs except the Recovery  
Media Creator.  
■ Do not run software such as screen savers which can put a heavy load  
on the CPU.  
■ Operate the computer at full power.  
■ Do not use power-saving features.  
■ Do not write to the media when the virus check software is running.  
Wait for it to finish, then disable virus detection programs including any  
software that checks files automatically in the background.  
■ Do not use utilities, including those intended to enhance hard disk drive  
access speed. They may cause unstable operation and damage data.  
■ Do not shut down/log off or Sleep/Hibernate while writing or rewriting  
the media.  
■ Set the computer on a level surface and avoid places subjected to  
vibrations such as airplanes, trains, or cars.  
■ Do not use on an unstable surface such as a stand.  
A recovery image of the software on your computer is stored on the hard  
disk drive, and can be copied to either DVD or USB Flash Memory by using  
the following steps:  
1. Select either blank DVD or USB Flash Memory.  
2. The application will allow you to choose from a variety of different media  
onto which the recovery image can be copied including DVD-R, DVD-R  
DL, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R DL, DVD+RW and USB Flash Memory.  
■ Please note that some of the above media may not be compatible with  
the optical disc drive installed into your computer. You should therefore  
verify the optical disc drive supports the blank media you have chosen  
before proceeding.  
■ USB Flash Memory will be formatted and all the data in the USB flash  
drive will be lost when proceeding.  
3. Turn on your computer and allow it to load the Windows 7 operating  
system from the hard disk drive as normal.  
4. Insert the media into the computer.  
■ Insert the first blank disc into the optical disc drive tray, or  
■ Insert the USB Flash Memory into one available USB port  
5. Double click the Recovery Media Creator icon on the Windows 7  
desktop, or select the application from Start Menu.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-13  
 
Getting Started  
6. After Recovery Media Creator starts, select the type of media and the  
title you wish to copy. The screen will display the number of discs or the  
capacity of USB Flash Memory required. Make sure you have a  
sufficient number of discs or sufficient capacity of USB Flash Memory  
before you proceed with the Recovery Media process.  
7. Click the Create button to proceed.  
Restoring the pre-installed software from the Recovery hard disk  
drive  
A portion of the total hard disk drive space is configured as a hidden  
recovery partition. This partition stores files which can be used to restore  
pre-installed software in the event of a problem.  
If you subsequently set up your hard disk drive again, do not change,  
delete or add partitions in a manner other than specified in the manual,  
otherwise you may find that space for the required software is not available.  
In addition, if you use a third-party partitioning program to reconfigure the  
partitions on your hard disk drive, you may find that it becomes impossible  
to setup your computer.  
When the sound mute feature has been activated by pressing the FN +  
ESC key, be sure to disable this to allow sounds to be heard before starting  
the restore process. Please refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for further  
details.  
You can not use System Recovery Options if restoring the pre-installed  
software without System Recovery Options.  
When you reinstall the Windows operating system, the hard disk will be  
reformatted and all data will be lost.  
1. Turn off your computer.  
2. While holding down 0 (zero) key on the keyboard, turn on your  
computer.  
3. A menu will be displayed from which you should follow the on-screen  
instructions.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-14  
 
Getting Started  
Restoring the pre-installed software from your created Recovery  
Media  
If the pre-installed files are damaged, you are able to either use the  
Recovery Media you have created or the hard disk drive recovery process  
to restore the computer to the state it was in when you originally received it.  
To perform this restoration, follow the steps below:  
When the sound mute feature has been activated by pressing the FN +  
ESC key, be sure to disable this to allow sounds to be heard before starting  
the restore process. Please refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for further  
details.  
You can not use System Recovery Options if restoring the pre-installed  
software without System Recovery Options.  
When you reinstall the Windows operating system, the hard disk will be  
reformatted and all data will be lost.  
1. Load the Recovery Media into the computer and turn off the computer's  
power.  
2. While holding down F12 key on the keyboard, turn on your computer -  
when the TOSHIBA logo screen appears, release the F12 key.  
3. Use the left and right cursors key to select the appropriate icon (CD-  
ROM or USB icon) of your actual recovery media from the menu.  
Please refer to the Boot Priority section in Chapter 7, HW Setup for  
further information.  
4. A menu will be displayed from which you should follow the on-screen  
instructions.  
When drivers/utilities are installed, you can setup the respective drivers /  
utilities from the following place.  
To open the setup files, click Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA ->  
Applications and Drivers.  
User’s Manual  
1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2  
The Grand Tour  
This chapter identifies the various components of the computer - it is  
recommended that you become familiar with each before you operate the  
computer.  
Legal Footnote (Non-applicable Icons)*1  
For more information regarding Non-applicable Icons, please refer to the  
Legal Footnotes section in Appendix H or click the *1 above.  
Please handle your computer carefully to avoid scratching or damaging the  
surface.  
Front with the display closed  
The following figure shows the computer’s front with its display panel in the  
closed position.  
System indicators  
SD Card slot  
Figure 2-1 Front of the computer with display panel closed  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-1  
       
The Grand Tour  
System indicators  
SD Card slot  
These LED indicators allow you to monitor the  
status of various computer functions and are  
described in more detail within the System  
indicators section.  
This slot can accommodate a single SD/SDHC  
memory card in order to transfer data from  
devices, such as digital cameras, onto your  
computer.  
Left side  
The following figure shows the computer’s left side.  
External monitor  
port  
Volume control dial  
Microphone jack  
eSATA/USB  
combo port  
Cooling vents  
UniversalSerial Bus  
(USB 2.0) port  
Security lock slot  
Headphone jack  
Figure 2-2 The left side of the computer  
External monitor  
port  
This port provides 15-pin, analog VGA port.  
This port allows you to connect an external  
monitor to the computer.  
There are no fastening screws for an external monitor cable on this  
computer's external monitor port. However, external monitor cables which  
have connectors with fastening screws can still be used.  
Cooling vents  
The cooling vents help keep the processor from  
overheating.  
Do not block the cooling vents. Keep foreign metal objects, such as  
screws, staples and paper clips, out of the cooling vents. Foreign metal  
objects can create a short circuit, which can cause damage and fire,  
possibly resulting in serious injury.  
User’s Manual  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
The Grand Tour  
Security lock slot  
A security cable can be attached to this slot and  
then connected to a desk or other large object in  
order to deter theft of the computer.  
eSATA/USB combo  
port  
One eSATA/USB combo port, which complies to  
the USB 2.0 standard, is provided on the left  
hand side of the computer. The ports with the  
icon (  
) has USB Sleep and Charge. This port  
has eSATA (External Serial ATA) function.  
Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, out of  
the eSATA/USB combo port. Foreign metal objects can create a short  
circuit, which can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious  
injury.  
Please note that it is not possible to confirm the operation of all functions of  
all USB devices that are available. In view of this it may be noted that some  
functions associated with a specific device might not operate properly.  
Universal Serial Bus One Universal Serial Bus port, which complies to  
(USB 2.0) port  
the USB 2.0 standard, is provided on the left  
hand side of the computer.  
Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, out of  
the USB connectors. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit,  
which can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.  
Please note that it is not possible to confirm the operation of all functions of  
all USB devices that are available. In view of this it may be noted that some  
functions associated with a specific device might not operate properly.  
Microphone jack  
A 3.5 mm mini microphone jack enables  
connection of a three-conductor mini jack for  
monaural microphone input.  
Headphone jack  
A 3.5 mm mini headphone jack enables  
connection of stereo headphones.  
Volume control dial  
Use this dial to adjust the volume of the internal  
stereo speaker and optional external stereo  
headphones (if connected).  
Move the Volume control dial to the left to  
increase the volume and to the right to decrease  
the volume.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-3  
         
The Grand Tour  
Right side  
The following figure shows the computer’s right side.  
Link indicator  
(green)  
LAN active indicator  
(orange)  
Wireless  
communication switch  
Smart Card slot  
DC IN 15V  
jack  
LAN jack  
Universal Serial Bus (USB 2.0) port  
ExpressCard slot  
Optical disc drive  
Figure 2-3 The right side of the computer  
DC IN 15V jack  
The AC adaptor connects to this jack in order to  
power the computer and charge its internal  
batteries. Please note that you should only use  
the model of AC adaptor supplied with the  
computer at the time of purchase - using the  
wrong AC adaptor can cause damage to the  
computer.  
LAN jack  
This jack lets you connect to a LAN. The adaptor  
has built-in support for Ethernet LAN (10  
megabits per second, 10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet  
LAN (100 megabits per second, 100BASE-TX)  
and Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per  
second, 1000BASE-T). Refer to Chapter 4,  
Operating Basics, for details.  
■ Do not connect any cable other than a LAN cable to the LAN jack. It  
could cause damage or malfunction.  
■ Do not connect the LAN cable to a power supply. It could cause  
damage or malfunction.  
Link indicator  
(green)  
This indicator glows green when the computer is  
connected to a LAN and the LAN is functioning  
properly.  
LAN active indicator This indicator glows orange when data is being  
(orange) exchanged between the computer and the LAN.  
Universal Serial Bus One Universal Serial Bus port, which complies to  
(USB 2.0) port  
the USB 2.0 standard, is provided on the right  
hand side of the computer.  
ExpressCard slot  
This slot allows you to install a single  
ExpressCard device.  
User’s Manual  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
The Grand Tour  
Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, out of  
the ExpressCard slot. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit,  
which can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.  
Wireless  
communication  
switch  
Slide this switch to the left to turn off Wireless  
LAN, Bluetooth™ and Wireless WAN functions.  
Slide it to the right to turn on the functions.  
Only some models are equipped with Bluetooth,  
Wireless LAN and Wireless WAN functions.  
®
■ Do not use the Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi ) or Bluetooth functionalities near  
a microwave oven or in areas subject to radio interference or magnetic  
fields. Interference from a microwave oven or other source can disrupt  
Wi-Fi or Bluetooth operation.  
■ Turn all wireless functionalities off when near a person who may have a  
cardiac pacemaker implant or other medical electric device. Radio  
waves may affect pacemaker or medical device operation, possibly  
resulting in serious injury. Follow the instruction of your medical device  
when using any wireless functionality.  
■ Always turn off wireless functionality if the computer is near automatic  
control equipment or appliances such as automatic doors or fire  
detectors. Radio waves can cause malfunction of such equipment,  
possibly resulting in serious injury.  
Optical disc drive  
Smart Card slot  
The computer is configured with a DVD Super  
Multi drive.  
This slot can accommodate a single Smart Card  
device. Some models are equipped with a Smart  
Card slot.  
Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, out of  
the Smart Card slot. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which  
can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-5  
 
The Grand Tour  
Back  
The following figure shows the computer’s back.  
Battery pack  
Figure 2-4 The back of the computer  
Battery pack  
The battery pack provides power to the computer  
when the AC adaptor is not connected. For more  
detailed information on the use and operation of  
the battery pack please refer to Chapter 6, Power  
and Power-Up Modes.  
Underside  
The following figure shows the underside of the computer. You should  
ensure that the display is closed before the computer is turned over to  
avoid causing any damage.  
Notch  
Battery release latch  
Battery lock  
Notch  
Docking port  
Memory module slot  
Figure 2-5 The underside of the computer  
User’s Manual  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The Grand Tour  
Notches  
Notches on the computer engage hooks on the  
TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator to ensure a  
secure connection.  
Docking port  
This port enables connection of an optional  
TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator or a Slice  
Expansion Battery described in Chapter 3,  
Hardware, Utilities and Options.  
■ Only the TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator can be used with this  
computer. Do not attempt to use any other Port Replicator.  
■ Keep foreign objects out of the docking port. A pin or similar object can  
damage the computer's circuitry.  
■ Do not use the computer's External monitor port, when connecting the  
TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator to the computer.  
Memory module slot The memory module slot allows for the  
installation, replacement and removal of  
additional memory module.  
Refer to the Additional memory module section in  
Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options.  
Battery release latch Slide and hold this latch into its 'Unlock' position  
in order to release the battery pack for removal.  
For more detailed information on removing the  
battery pack please refer to Chapter 6, Power  
and Power-Up Modes.  
Battery lock  
Slide the battery lock to release the battery pack  
ready for removal.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-7  
 
The Grand Tour  
Front with the display open  
This section shows the computer with the display panel open. In order to  
open the display, lift the display panel up and position it at a comfortable  
viewing angle for you.  
Wireless LAN antennas (Not shown)  
Wireless WAN antennas  
(Not shown)  
Wireless LAN antenna  
(Not shown)  
Web Camera  
Web Camera LED  
Display hinge  
Display  
screen  
Stereo speaker  
(Right)  
Keyboard  
Fingerprint Sensor  
Display hinge  
Stereo speaker  
(Left)  
Power button  
Bluetooth antenna  
(Not shown)  
LCD Sensor switch  
(Not shown)  
TOSHIBA Assist  
button  
Touch Pad  
control buttons  
TOSHIBA  
Presentation button  
Touch Pad  
Microphone  
Figure 2-6 The front of the computer with the display panel open  
Display hinges  
The display hinges allow the display panel to be  
position at a variety of easy-to-view angles.  
Display screen  
Please be aware that, when the computer is  
operating on the AC adaptor, the image  
displayed on the internal screen will be  
somewhat brighter than when it operates on  
battery power. This difference in brightness  
levels is intended to save power when operating  
on batteries. For more information on the  
computer's display, please refer to the Display  
Controller and Video mode section in Appendix  
B.  
Web Camera LED  
The Web Camera LED glows when the Web  
Camera is operating.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-8  
           
The Grand Tour  
Web Camera  
Web Camera is a device that allows you to  
record video or take photographs with your  
computer. You can use it for video chatting or  
video conferences using a communication tool  
such as Windows Live Messenger. TOSHIBA  
Web Camera Application will help you to add  
various video effects to your video or photograph.  
Enables the transmission of video and use of  
video chat via the internet using specialized  
applications.  
The effective pixel count for this web camera is  
0.3 million (maximum photograph size: 640x480  
pixels).  
Some models are equipped with a Web Camera.  
Please refer to the Web Camera section in  
Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Touch Pad  
The Touch Pad located in the center of the palm  
rest is used to control the movement of the on-  
screen pointer. For more information, please  
refer to the Using the Touch Pad section in  
Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Touch Pad control  
buttons  
The control buttons located below the Touch Pad  
allow you to select menu items or manipulate text  
and graphics as designated by the on-screen  
pointer.  
Microphone  
Keyboard  
A built-in microphone allows you to import and  
record sounds for your application - please refer  
to the Sound System section in Chapter 4,  
Operating Basics for more information.  
The internal keyboard provides the embedded  
numeric overlay keys, dedicated cursor control  
overlay keys,  
and  
Keys. The keyboard  
is compatible with the IBM® enhanced keyboard.  
Refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for details.  
Stereo speakers  
Power button  
The speakers emit sound generated by your  
software as well as audio alarms, such as low  
battery condition, generated by the system.  
Press this button to turn the computer's power on  
and off.  
TOSHIBA Assist  
button  
Press this button to launch the program  
automatically. When power-off, Sleep Mode and  
Hibernation Mode, press this button to start the  
computer and launch the program.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-9  
         
The Grand Tour  
TOSHIBA  
Presentation button  
The TOSHIBA Presentation button has the same  
functionality as the Connect display button in the  
Mobility Center.  
Fingerprint Sensor  
LCD Sensor switch  
This sensor enables you to enroll and recognize  
a fingerprint.  
For detailed information on Fingerprint Sensor,  
refer to Chapter 4, Using the Fingerprint Sensor.  
This switch senses when the display panel is  
either closed or opened and activates the Panel  
Power Off/On feature as appropriate. For  
example, when you close the display panel the  
computer enters Hibernation Mode and shuts  
itself down and then, when you next open the  
display, the computer will automatically start up  
and return you to the application you were  
previously working on.  
You can specify within the Power Options. To  
access it, click Start -> Control Panel -> System  
and Security -> Power Options.  
Do not put any magnetic objects close to this switch as they may cause the  
computer to automatically enter Hibernation Mode and shut down even if  
the Panel Power Off feature is disabled.  
Bluetooth antenna  
Some computers in this series are equipped with  
a Bluetooth antenna.  
Wireless LAN  
antennas  
Some computers in this series are equipped with  
the Wireless LAN antennas.  
Wireless WAN  
antennas  
Some computers in this series are equipped with  
the Wireless WAN antennas.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-10  
The Grand Tour  
Indicators  
This section explains indicator functions.  
System indicators  
The LED system indicators for specific computer operations glow when  
those operations are in progress.  
Figure 2-7 System indicators  
DC IN  
The DC IN indicator normally glows green when  
power is being correctly supplied from the AC  
power adaptor. However, If the output voltage  
from the adaptor is abnormal, or if the computer's  
power supply malfunctions, this indicator will  
flash orange.  
Power  
The Power indicator normally glows green when  
the computer is turned on. However, if you turn  
the computer off into Sleep Mode, this indicator  
will flash orange - approximately one second on,  
two seconds off - both while the system is  
shutting down and while it remains turned off.  
Battery  
The Battery indicator shows the condition of the  
battery's charge - green indicates the battery is  
fully charged, orange indicates the battery is  
charging, and flashing orange indicates a low  
battery condition. Please refer to Chapter 6,  
Power and Power-Up Modes for more  
information on this feature.  
2nd battery  
The 2nd battery indicator shows the condition of  
the Slice Expansion Battery's charge - green  
indicates the Slice Expansion Battery is fully  
charged, orange indicates the Slice Expansion  
Battery is charging, and flashing orange indicates  
a low battery condition.  
Please refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up  
Modes for more information on this feature.  
Hard Disk Drive  
SD Card  
The Hard Disk Drive indicator glows green  
whenever the computer is accessing the built-in  
hard disk drive.  
The SD Card indicator glows green when the  
computer is accessing the device in the SD Card  
slot.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-11  
             
The Grand Tour  
Wireless  
communication  
The Wireless communication indicator glows  
orange when the Bluetooth and Wireless LAN  
functions are turned on.  
Only some models are equipped with Bluetooth  
and Wireless LAN functions.  
Wireless WAN  
The Wireless WAN indicator glows or blinks blue  
when the Wireless WAN function is on.  
The indicator will glow or blink in order to indicate  
the connection status of the Wireless WAN  
function.  
A Wireless WAN module must be installed to use  
this function. Some models are equipped with a  
Wireless WAN module.  
Keyboard indicators  
The following figures show the positions of the CAPS LOCK indicator and  
the keypad overlay indicators which show the following conditions:  
■ When the CAPS LOCK indicator glows, the keyboard will produce  
capitals when any letter is typed.  
■ When the Arrow Mode indicator glows, the keypad overlay allows you to  
use cursor functions.  
■ When the Numeric Mode indicator glows, the keypad overlay allows  
you to enter numbers.  
CAPS LOCK indicator  
Figure 2-8 CAPS LOCK indicator  
CAPS LOCK  
This indicator glows green when letter keys are  
locked into their uppercase format.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-12  
 
The Grand Tour  
Arrow mode  
indicator  
Numeric mode  
indicator  
Figure 2-9 Keypad overlay indicators  
Arrow mode  
When the Arrow mode indicator lights green,  
you can use the gray labeled keys on the keypad  
overlay as cursor keys. Please refer to the  
Keypad overlay section in Chapter 5, The  
Keyboard for more information.  
Numeric mode  
When the Numeric mode indicator lights green,  
you can use the gray labeled keys on the keypad  
overlay for number entry. Please refer to the  
Keypad overlay section in Chapter 5, The  
Keyboard for more information.  
Optical disc drives  
The computer is installed with a DVD Super Multi drive. A Serial ATA  
interface controller is used for CD/DVD-ROM operation. When the  
computer is accessing a CD/DVD, an indicator on the drive glows.  
For information on loading and unloading discs refer to the Using optical  
disc drives section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Region codes for DVD drives and media  
DVD Super Multi drives and their associated media are manufactured  
according to the specifications of six marketing regions. When you  
purchase DVD-Video, make sure it matches your drive, otherwise it will not  
play properly.  
Code  
Region  
1
2
3
4
Canada, United States  
Japan, Europe, South Africa, Middle East  
Southeast Asia, East Asia  
Australia, New Zealand, Pacific Islands, Central  
America, South America, Caribbean  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-13  
   
The Grand Tour  
5
6
Russia, Indian Subcontinent, Africa, North Korea,  
Mongolia  
China  
Writable discs  
This section describes the types of writable CD/DVD discs. Check the  
specifications of your drive to see the types of discs it can write. Use  
TOSHIBA Disc Creator to write compact discs. Refer to Chapter 4,  
Operating Basics.  
CDs  
■ CD-R discs can be written only once. The recorded data cannot be  
erased or changed.  
■ CD-RW discs including multi speed CD-RW discs, high-speed CD-RW  
discs and ultra-speed CD-RW discs can be recorded more than once.  
DVDs  
■ DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-R (Dual Layer) and DVD+R (Double Layer) discs  
can be written only once. The recorded data cannot be erased or  
changed.  
■ DVD-RW, DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can be recorded more than  
once.  
Formats  
The drives support the following formats.  
DVD Super Multi drive Double Layer  
The drive supports the formats CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, DVD-Video, CD-DA,  
CD-Text, Photo CDTM (single/multi-session), CD-ROM Mode 1, Mode 2,  
CD-ROM XA Mode 2 (Form1, Form2), Enhanced CD (CD-EXTRA),  
Addressing Method 2, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW,  
DVD+R, DVD+R DL, DVD+RW and DVD-RAM.  
Some types and formats of DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL discs may be  
unreadable.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-14  
 
The Grand Tour  
DVD Super Multi drive Double Layer  
The full-size DVD Super Multi drive module lets you record data to  
rewritable CD/DVDs as well as run either 12 cm (4.72") or 8cm (3.15")  
CD/DVDs without using an adaptor.  
The read speed is slower at the center of a disc and faster at the outer  
edge.  
DVD read  
8 speed (maximum)  
DVD-R write  
DVD-R DL write  
DVD-RW write  
DVD+R write  
DVD+R DL write  
DVD+RW write  
DVD-RAM write  
CD read  
8 speed (maximum)  
4 speed (maximum)  
6 speed (maximum)  
8 speed (maximum)  
4 speed (maximum)  
8 speed (maximum)  
5 speed (maximum)  
24 speed (maximum)  
24 speed (maximum)  
16 speed (maximum, Ultra-speed media)  
CD-R write  
CD-RW write  
AC adaptor  
The AC adaptor can automatically adjust to any voltage ranging from 100 to  
240 volts and to a frequency of either 50 or 60 hertz, enabling you to use  
this computer in almost all country/region. The adaptor converts AC power  
to DC power and reduces the voltage supplied to this computer.  
To recharge the battery, simply connect the AC adaptor to a power source  
and to the computer. Please refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up  
Modes for further information.  
Figure 2-10 The AC adaptor (2-pin plug)  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-15  
   
The Grand Tour  
Figure 2-11 The AC adaptor (3-pin plug)  
■ Depending on the model in question, either a 2-pin or 3-pin  
adaptor/power lead will be bundled with the computer.  
■ Do not use a 3-pin to 2-pin conversion plug.  
■ The supplied power cord conforms to safety rules and regulations in  
the region the product is bought and should not be used outside of this  
region. In order to use the adaptor/computer in other regions, you  
should please buy a power cord that conforms to the safety rules and  
regulations in that particular region.  
Always use the TOSHIBA AC adaptor that was included with your  
computer, or use AC adaptors specified by TOSHIBA to avoid any risk of  
fire or other damage to the computer. Use of an incompatible AC adaptor  
could cause fire or damage to the computer possibly resulting in serious  
injury. TOSHIBA assumes no liability for any damage caused by use of an  
incompatible adaptor.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-16  
Chapter 3  
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Hardware  
This section describes the hardware of your computer.  
The actual specifications may vary depending on the model you  
purchased.  
Processor  
CPU  
Your computer is equipped with one processor  
and processor type varies depending on model.  
To check which type of processor is included in  
your model, open the TOSHIBA PC Diagnostic  
Tool Utility by clicking Start -> All programs ->  
TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> PC Diagnostic Tool.  
Some models in this series use Intel® Centrino® 2 processor technology  
which is based on three separate components, the Intel® Core™ 2 Duo  
processor, Intel® Wi-Fi Link 5100AGN and the Intel® GS45 Express  
Chipset.  
Legal Footnote (CPU)*2  
For more information on the CPU, please refer to the Legal Footnotes  
section in Appendix H or Click the *2 above.  
User’s Manual  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Memory  
Memory slots  
1,024 or 2,048MB memory modules can be  
installed in the computer's two memory slots for a  
maximum of 4,096MB system memory.  
This computer can be equipped with memory  
modules of a maximum size of 4,096MB. The  
actual amount of useable system memory will be  
less than the installed memory modules.  
Video RAM  
The memory in a computer's graphics adaptor,  
used to store the image displayed on a bitmap  
display.  
The amount of Video RAM available is  
dependent on the computer's system memory.  
Start -> Control Panel -> Appearance and  
Personalization -> Display -> Adjust  
resolution.  
The amount of Video RAM can be verified by  
clicking the Advanced Settings button in the  
Screen Resolution window.  
If your computer is configured with more than 3 GB memory, the memory  
might be displayed as approximately 3 GB only (depending on the  
computer’s hardware specifications).  
This is correct because the operating system usually displays the available  
memory instead of the physical memory (RAM) built into the computer.  
Various system components (like the video adapter’s GPU and PCI  
devices like Wireless LAN, etc.) require their own memory space. Since a  
32-bit operating system cannot address more than 4 GB of memory, these  
system resources overlap the physical memory. It is a technical limitation  
that the overlapped memory is not available to the operating system. Even  
though some tools might display the actual physical memory built into your  
computer, the memory available to the operating system will still be  
approximately 3 GB only.  
Legal Footnote (Memory (Main System))*3  
For more information regarding Memory (Main System), please refer to the  
Legal Footnotes section in Appendix H or click the *3 above.  
Power  
Battery pack  
The computer is powered by one rechargeable  
lithium-ion battery pack.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-2  
       
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Legal Footnote (Battery Life)*4  
For more information regarding Battery Life, please refer to the Legal  
Footnotes section in Appendix H or click the *4 above.  
RTC battery  
AC adaptor  
The internal RTC battery backs up the Real Time  
Clock (RTC) and calendar.  
The AC adaptor provides power to the system  
and recharges the batteries when they are low. It  
comes with a detachable power cord which will  
either have a 2-pin or 3-pin plug enclosure.  
As the AC adaptor is universal, it can receive a  
range of AC voltages from 100 to 240 volts,  
however you should note that the output current  
varies among different models. Using the wrong  
adaptor can damage your computer. Refer to the  
AC adaptor section in Chapter 2, The Grand  
Tour.  
Disks  
Hard disk drive or  
Solid state drive  
This computer is equipped with one of the  
following hard disk drive (HDD) types. The  
capacity of each hard disk drive model is  
different.  
Some models are equipped with a "Solid State  
Drive (SSD)" instead of a hard disk drive.  
■ HDD  
■ 80GB  
■ 120GB  
■ 160GB  
■ 200GB  
■ 250GB  
■ 320GB  
■ SSD  
■ 64GB  
■ 128GB  
Please note that part of the hard disk or Solid  
state drive's overall capacity is reserved as  
administration space. Additional HDD/SSD drive  
sizes may be introduced.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-3  
       
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
■ Additional hard disk drive sizes may be introduced.  
■ In this manual, the word "HDD" or "Hard disk drive" also refers to the  
SSD unless otherwise stated.  
■ SSD is a large-capacity storage media which uses Solid-State Memory  
in place of a magnetic disk of the hard disk.  
Under certain unusual conditions of prolonged non-use and/or exposure to  
high temperatures, the SSD may be vulnerable to data retention errors.  
Legal Footnote (Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity)*5  
For more information regarding Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity, please  
refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Appendix H or click the *5 above.  
Optical disc drive  
Drive  
The following optical disc drive is pre-installed in  
this computer.  
■ DVD Super Multi drive Double Layer  
2.6GB and 5.2GB DVD-RAM media cannot be read from or written to.  
Display  
The computer's internal display panel supports high-resolution video  
graphics and can be set to a wide range of viewing angles for maximum  
comfort and readability.  
Display panel  
14.1” TFT LCD screen, 16 million colors, with  
one of the following resolutions:  
■ WXGA, 1280 horizontal x 800 vertical pixels  
■ WXGA+, 1440 horizontal x 900 vertical pixels  
Legal Footnote (LCD)*6  
For more information regarding the LCD, please refer to the Legal  
Footnotes section in Appendix H or click the *6 above.  
Graphics controller  
The graphics controller maximizes display  
performance. Refer to Display Controller and  
Video mode section in Appendix B for more  
information.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-4  
       
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Legal Footnote (Graphics Processor Unit ("GPU"))*7  
For more information regarding the Graphics Processor Unit ("GPU"),  
please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Appendix H or click the *7  
above.  
Sound  
Sound system  
The integrated sound system provides support  
for the computer's internal speakers and  
microphone, as allowing an external microphone  
and headphones to be connected via the  
appropriate jacks.  
Multimedia  
Web Camera  
Web Camera is a device that allows you to  
record video or take photographs with your  
computer. You can use it for video chatting or  
video conferences using a communication tool  
such as Windows Live Messenger. TOSHIBA  
Web Camera Application will help you to add  
various video effects to your video or photograph.  
Some models are equipped with a Web Camera.  
Please refer to the Web Camera section in  
Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Communications  
LAN  
The computer has built-in support for Ethernet  
LAN (10 megabits per second, 10BASE-T), Fast  
Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second,  
100BASE-TX) and Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000  
megabits per second, 1000BASE-T).  
Bluetooth  
Some computers in this series have Bluetooth  
wireless communication function which  
eliminates the need for cables between  
electronic devices such as computers, printers  
and mobile phones. When it is enabled,  
Bluetooth provides the wireless personal area  
network environment which is safe and  
trustworthy, that is quick and easy.  
Wireless LAN  
Some computers in this series are equipped with  
a Wireless LAN module that is compatible with  
other LAN systems based on Direct Sequence  
Spread Spectrum/Orthogonal Frequency Division  
Multiplexing radio technology that complies with  
the IEEE 802.11 Standard.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-5  
         
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Legal Footnote (Wireless LAN)*8  
For more information regarding Wireless LAN, please refer to the Legal  
Footnotes section in Appendix H or click the *8 above.  
Wireless WAN  
A Wireless WAN card supports HSPA and  
provides faster communications than previous  
Wireless WAN cards.  
Some computers in this series are equipped with  
a Wireless WAN card.  
Special features  
The following features are either unique to TOSHIBA computers or are  
advanced features which make the computer more convenient to use.  
Access each function using the following procedures.  
*1 To access the Power Options, click Start -> Control Panel -> System  
and Security -> Power Options.  
TOSHIBA Assist  
button  
Press this button to launch the program  
automatically. When power-off, Sleep Mode and  
Hibernation Mode, press this button to start the  
computer and launch the program.  
TOSHIBA  
The TOSHIBA Presentation button has the same  
Presentation button functionality as the Connect display button in the  
Mobility Center.  
Hot keys  
Hot keys are specific key combinations that let  
you quickly change the system configuration  
directly from the keyboard without running a  
system program.  
Display automatic  
This feature automatically cuts off power to the  
computer's display panel when there is no  
keyboard input for a specified time, with power  
being restored the next time a key is pressed.  
This can be specified in the Power Options.  
*1  
power off  
HDD automatic  
This feature automatically cuts off power to the  
hard disk drive when it is not accessed for a  
specified time, with power being restored when  
the hard disk drive is next accessed. This can be  
specified in the Power Options.  
*1  
power off  
System automatic  
Sleep/Hibernation  
This feature automatically shuts down the system  
into either Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode when  
there is no input or hardware access for a  
specified time. This can be specified in the Power  
Options.  
*1  
Mode  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-6  
                   
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Keypad overlay  
A ten-key numeric keypad is integrated into the  
keyboard. Please refer to the Keypad overlay  
section in Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for  
information on using this feature.  
Power on password Two levels of password security, supervisor and  
user, are available to prevent unauthorized  
access to your computer.  
Instant security  
A specific hot key function automatically locks the  
system providing data security.  
Intelligent power  
A microprocessor in the computer's intelligent  
power supply detects the battery's charge,  
automatically calculates the remaining battery  
capacity and protects electronic components  
from abnormal conditions such as a voltage  
overload from the AC adaptor. This can be  
specified in the Power Options.  
*1  
supply  
*1  
This feature lets you configure the computer in  
order to save battery power. This can be  
specified in the Power Options.  
Battery save mode  
Panel power on/off  
*1  
This feature automatically turns power to the  
computer off when the display panel is closed,  
and turns it back on when the display panel is  
opened. This can be specified in the Power  
Options.  
Low battery  
automatic  
When battery power is exhausted to the point that  
computer operation cannot be continued, the  
system automatically enters Hibernation Mode  
and shuts itself down. This can be specified in the  
Power Options.  
*1  
Hibernation Mode  
*1  
To protect against overheating, the processor has  
an internal temperature sensor so that, if the  
computer's internal temperature rises to a certain  
level, the cooling fan is turned on or the  
processing speed is lowered. This can be  
specified in the Power Options.  
Heat dispersal  
TOSHIBA HDD  
Protection  
This feature uses the acceleration sensor built in  
the computer to detect vibration and shocks, and  
automatically moves the hard disk drive's  
read/write head to a safe position in order to  
reduce the risk of damage that could be caused  
by head-to-disk contact. Refer to the Using the  
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Protection section in  
Chapter 4, Operating Basics, for more details.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-7  
           
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
■ The TOSHIBA HDD Protection function does not guarantee that the  
hard disk drive will not be damaged.  
■ TOSHIBA HDD Protection cannot be used in models that are equipped  
with SSD.  
Hibernation Mode  
This feature lets you turn off the power to the  
computer without exiting from your software. The  
contents of main memory are automatically  
saved to the hard disk drive so that when you  
next turn the power on again, you can continue  
working right where you left off. Refer to the  
Turning off the power section in Chapter 1,  
Getting Started, for more details.  
Sleep Mode  
If you have to interrupt your work, you can use  
this feature to allow you to turn off power to the  
computer without exiting from your software.  
Data is maintained in the computer's main  
memory so that when you next turn on the power,  
you can continue working right where you left off.  
USB Sleep and  
Charge function  
This feature allows you to charge USB-  
compatible external devices such as mobile  
phones or portable digital music players via the  
USB port when your computer is in Sleep Mode,  
Hibernation Mode or in the shutdown state.  
This function is worked by the USB Sleep and  
Charge Utility. For more information, please refer  
to the Using the TOSHIBA USB Sleep and  
Charge Utility section in Chapter 4, Operating  
Basics.  
Legal Footnote (USB Sleep and Charge)*9  
For more information regarding USB Sleep and Charge, please refer to the  
Legal Footnotes section in Appendix H or click the *9 above.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-8  
   
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
USB Wakeup  
function  
This function restores the computer from Sleep  
Mode depending on the external devices  
connected to the USB ports.  
For example, if a mouse or USB keyboard is  
connected to a USB port, moving the  
mouse/keyboard will wakeup the computer.  
The "USB Wakeup function" operates under  
Windows 7 operating system and it works for all  
USB ports.  
TOSHIBA PC Health The TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor application  
Monitor  
proactively monitors a number of system  
functions such as power consumption, battery  
health and the system cooling, informing you of  
significant system conditions. This application  
recognizes the system and individual component  
serial numbers, and will track specific activities  
related to the computer and their usage.  
Refer to Appendix G, TOSHIBA PC Health  
Monitor.  
TOSHIBA Value Added Package  
This section describes the TOSHIBA Component features pre-installed on  
the computer.  
TOSHIBA Power  
Saver  
TOSHIBA Power Saver provides you with the  
features of more various power supply  
managements.  
TOSHIBA Button  
Support  
This utility controls the following computer button  
functions.  
■ TOSHIBA Assist  
■ TOSHIBA Presentation  
The starting application from the button can be  
changed.  
TOSHIBA Zooming  
Utility  
This utility allows you to enlarge or reduce the  
icon size on the Windows Desktop, or the zoom  
factor associated with specific supported  
applications.  
TOSHIBA PC  
Diagnostic Tool  
The TOSHIBA PC Diagnostic Tool will display  
basic system configuration information and allow  
the functionality of some of the computer's built-  
in hardware devices to be tested.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-9  
         
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
TOSHIBA Password The TOSHIBA Password utility allows you to set  
a password in order to restrict access to the  
computer.  
Utility  
TOSHIBA Flash  
Cards  
The TOSHIBA Flash Cards provide a quick way  
to modify selected system functions and to  
launch applications.  
■ Hot key function  
■ TOSHIBA utility launcher function  
HW Setup  
This utility allows you to customize your  
hardware settings according to the way you work  
with the computer and the peripherals you use.  
TOSHIBA  
Accessibility  
The TOSHIBA Accessibility utility provides  
support to movement impaired users when they  
need to use the TOSHIBA Hot-key functions. In  
use, the utility allows you to make the FN key  
'sticky', that is you can press it once, release it,  
and they press one of the 'Function' keys in  
order to access its specific function. When set,  
the FN key will remain active until another key is  
pressed.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-10  
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Utilities and Applications  
This section describes the pre-installed utilities that come with the  
computer and details how to start them. For further information on their  
operation, please refer to each utility's online manual, help files or  
README.TXT file.  
Fingerprint Utility  
This product has a fingerprint utility installed for  
the purpose of enrolling and recognizing  
fingerprints which can then be linked to a  
username and password in order to remove the  
need to input these details from the keyboard.  
Just by swiping an enrolled finger against the  
fingerprint sensor, the following functions will be  
enabled:  
■ Logon to Windows and access a security  
enabled homepage through Internet Explorer.  
■ Files and folders can be encrypted/decrypted  
and third party access to them is prevented.  
■ Disable the password-protected screen-saver  
when returning from a power-saving mode  
such as Sleep Mode.  
■ Authentication of the User Password (and, if  
applicable, the HDD(Hard Disk Drive)  
Password) when booting up the computer  
(Boot Authentication).  
■ Single Sign-on feature.  
TOSHIBA Face  
Recognition  
TOSHIBA Face Recognition uses a face  
verification library to verify the face data of users  
when they log in to Windows. If the verification is  
successful, the user will be logged into Windows  
automatically. The user can thus avoid having to  
enter a password or the like, which makes the  
login process easier.  
TOSHIBA Face Recognition can only be used in models that have a Web  
Camera installed.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-11  
 
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
TOSHIBA DVD  
Player  
This software is provided for playback of DVD  
Video.  
It has an on-screen interface and functions. Click  
Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA DVD  
PLAYER -> TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER.  
Refer to the TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER section in  
Chapter 4, Operating Basics, for more details.  
For details on how to use TOSHIBA DVD  
PLAYER, see the help file.  
■ Frame dropping, audio skipping or out of synch audio and video may  
occur during playback of some DVD Video titles.  
■ Make sure to connect the computer's AC adaptor when playing a DVD  
Video. Power-saving features may interfere with smooth playback.  
Bluetooth Stack for  
This software enables communication between  
Windows by Toshiba the computer and external Bluetooth devices  
such as printers and mobile phones.  
Bluetooth functions cannot be used in models that do not have a Bluetooth  
module installed.  
TOSHIBA SD  
The TOSHIBA SD Memory Boot Utility allows  
Memory Boot Utility you to create a bootable SD memory card to start  
the system. You can boot TOSHIBA SD Memory  
Boot Utility from the menu bar as follows. Click  
Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities  
-> SD Memory Boot Utility.  
■ SD Memory Card Format Utility and other SD functions are packaged  
into TOSHIBA SD Memory Utilities.  
■ Only the SD memory card can create a bootable SD memory card.  
TOSHIBA SD  
This utility allows you to format an SD/SDHC  
Memory Card Format memory card by the SD standard format.  
TOSHIBA Assist  
TOSHIBA Assist is a graphical user interface that  
provides access to specific tools, utilities and  
applications that make the use and configuration  
of the computer easier.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-12  
       
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
TOSHIBA ConfigFree TOSHIBA ConfigFree is a suite of utilities that  
improve the ease and control of communication  
devices and network connections, help in the  
identification of communication problems and  
allow the creation of profiles if you need to switch  
between different locations and communication  
networks. To access this utility, click Start -> All  
Programs -> TOSHIBA -> ConfigFree.  
TOSHIBA Mic Effect TOSHIBA Mic Effect provides you the Echo  
Canceller and the Microphone Array functions.  
For more instructions for this software, refer to  
the Sound System section in Chapter 4,  
Operating Basics.  
TOSHIBA eco Utility This PC is equipped with "eco mode". This mode  
slightly lowers performance of some devices to  
reduce electric power consumption. You can  
realize measurable power savings by using it  
continuously. TOSHIBA eco Utility helps you  
monitor your power savings by showing  
approximate real time power consumption.  
Furthermore, it shows approximate accumulated  
power consumption and approximate  
accumulated power savings when using eco  
mode daily, weekly and monthly. You can track  
power savings by using eco mode continuously.  
To start this utility, click Start -> All Programs ->  
TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> eco Utility.  
TOSHIBA Disc  
Creator  
You can create CD's and DVD's in a number of  
formats including audio CD's that can be played  
on a standard CD player, and data CD's/DVD's  
which can store copies of the files and folders on  
your computer's hard disk drive. This software  
can be used on models with a DVD Super Multi  
drive.  
To start this utility, click Start -> All Programs ->  
TOSHIBA -> CD&DVD Applications -> Disc  
Creator.  
TOSHIBA DVD-RAM This utility has the function of Physical Format  
Utility  
and Write-Protect to DVD-RAM. This utility is  
contained the setup module of TOSHIBA Disc  
Creator. To start this utility, click Start -> All  
Programs -> TOSHIBA -> CD&DVD  
Applications -> DVD-RAM Utility.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-13  
         
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
TOSHIBA HDD/SSD  
Alert  
This utility includes wizard functions to monitor  
the Disk Drive operating status and execute the  
system backup.  
To access this utility, click Start -> All Programs  
-> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> HDD SSD Alert.  
TOSHIBA Service  
Station  
This application allows your computer to  
automatically search for TOSHIBA software  
updates or other alerts from TOSHIBA that are  
specific to your computer system and its  
programs. When enabled, this application  
periodically transmits to our servers a limited  
amount of system information, which will be  
treated in strict accordance with the rules and  
regulations as well as applicable data protection  
law.  
To access this utility, click Start -> All Programs  
-> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> Service Station.  
Windows Mobility  
Center  
Mobility Center is a utility for accessing several  
mobile PC settings quickly in one window. A  
default maximum of eight tiles are provided by  
the operating system, and the additional two tiles  
are added to your Mobility Center.  
■ Lock Computer :  
This can be used to lock your computer  
without turning it off. This has the same  
function as selecting Lock from the Start  
menu (click Start, point to the arrow icon  
and then select Lock from  
the menu).  
■ TOSHIBA Assist :  
This can be used to open TOSHIBA Assist if  
it is already installed in your computer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-14  
     
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
TOSHIBA USB Sleep This utility is able to either enable or disable the  
and Charge Utility  
USB Sleep and Charge function.  
This utility shows the positions of USB ports that  
support the USB Sleep and Charge function and  
displays the battery's remaining capacity.  
To start this utility, click Start -> All Programs ->  
TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> USB Sleep and  
Charge.  
Trusted Platform  
Module (TPM)  
The TPM (Trusted Platform Module) is a security  
encryption device for the hard disk drive. To use  
TPM:  
1. Enable TPM through the BIOS setup by the  
following steps:  
1. Turn on the computer while pressing the  
ESC key.  
2. Press the F1 key when directed.  
3. Press the PGDN key.  
4. Press the down arrow key until TPM is  
highlighted, then press the space bar to  
change the TPM status to Enabled.  
5. Press the Y key to save the changes.  
6. Press END and then press the Y key to  
accept the changes. The computer will  
restart.  
Some models may have Hide TPM as an  
option on the BIOS setup screen. If your  
system shows Hide TPM, it should be set to  
No before you set TPM to Enabled.  
Otherwise, you will not be able to change  
TPM.  
2. Install Infineon TPM Software Professional  
Package from Start-> All Programs ->  
TOSHIBA -> Applications and Drivers.  
3. Perform the TPM configuration. We  
recommend that you read the help file of  
Infineon TPM software before you do the  
TPM initialization. You may refer to the Help  
from Start -> All Programs -> Infineon  
Security Platform Solution -> Help.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-15  
 
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Optional devices  
To connect optional devices (such as USB device or External monitor) to  
the computer, be sure to check the shape and orientation of the connector  
before connecting.  
Optional devices can expand the computer's capabilities and its versatility.  
This section describes the connection or installation of the following  
devices:  
Cards/memory  
■ ExpressCard  
■ Smart Card  
■ Secure Digital™ (SD) Card (SD memory card, SDHC memory card,  
miniSD Card, microSD Card)  
■ Additional memory module  
Peripheral devices  
■ External monitor  
■ USB FDD Kit  
■ eSATA  
■ TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator  
Other  
■ Security lock  
ExpressCard  
The computer is equipped with a single ExpressCard slot into which any  
ExpressCard device that meets industry standards, either manufactured by  
TOSHIBA or another vendor, can be installed. The slot supports hot plug  
connection and utilizes the PCI Express interface that supports the reading  
and writing of data at a theoretical maximum rate of 2.5Gbps.  
When inserted in the ExpressCard slot, some ExpressCards may block the  
optical disc drive tray and prevent it from opening. If this occurs please  
remove the ExpressCard each time you wish to open or close the optical  
disc drive tray.  
Inserting an ExpressCard  
The Windows hot-install feature allows you to insert ExpressCards while  
the computer is turned on.  
Do not insert an ExpressCard while the computer is in Sleep Mode or  
Hibernation Mode as you may find that some cards do not work properly.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-16  
     
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
To insert an ExpressCard, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Press the Dummy card in order to eject the Dummy card partially out of  
the computer.  
2. Grasp the Dummy card and draw it.  
3. Insert the ExpressCard into the ExpressCard slot on the side of the  
computer.  
4. Press the ExpressCard gently to ensure a firm connection is made.  
ExpressCard slot  
ExpressCard  
Figure 3-1 Inserting the ExpressCard  
5. After inserting the ExpressCard you should refer to its documentation  
and also check the configuration in Windows in order to ensure that it is  
correct.  
Removing an ExpressCard  
To remove an ExpressCard, follow the steps as detailed below.  
1. Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Windows Taskbar.  
2. Point to ExpressCard and click the left Touch Pad control button.  
3. Press the ExpressCard in order to eject the ExpressCard partially out of  
the computer.  
4. Grasp the ExpressCard and remove it.  
ExpressCard  
Figure 3-2 Removing the ExpressCard  
5. Insert the Dummy card into the ExpressCard slot.  
When you do not use a ExpressCard, please be sure to insert a Dummy  
card.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-17  
 
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Smart Card  
A Smart Card is a credit card sized plastic card. An extremely thin  
integrated circuit (IC chip) is embedded into the card on which information  
can be recorded. These cards can be used for a wide variety of  
applications including telephone related and electronic monetary payments.  
This section contains information on the proper use of the Smart Card slot,  
and it is strongly recommended that you read it before operating the  
computer.  
Some models are equipped with a Smart Card slot.  
Your computer supports ISO7816-3 asynchronous cards (support  
protocols are T=0 and T=1) with a working voltage of 5V.  
Inserting a Smart Card  
The Smart Card slot is located on the right side of the computer. The  
Windows hot-install feature allows you to insert a Smart Card while the  
computer is turned on.  
To install a Smart Card, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Insert the Smart Card into the Smart Card slot with the metal  
connectors facing up.  
2. Press the Smart Card gently to ensure a firm connection is made. The  
computer will identify the Smart Card and display an icon in the  
Windows Taskbar.  
■ When inserting a Smart Card into the Smart Card slot, make sure to  
confirm that the card is oriented correctly before inserting.  
■ Insert the Smart Card until it reaches the end of the Smart Card slot.  
There will be about 2cm of the Smart Card sticking out of the Smart  
Card slot. Do not attempt to insert it further.  
■ Always remove the Smart Card from the Smart Card slot before moving  
the computer.  
■ Remove the Smart Card after use.  
Failure to follow these instructions may result in damage to the computer  
and/or damage to the Smart Card.  
Smart Card  
Figure 3-3 Inserting a Smart Card  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-18  
   
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
3. After inserting the Smart Card, you should refer to its documentation  
and also check the configuration in Windows in order to ensure that it is  
correct.  
Removing a Smart Card  
To remove a Smart Card, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Windows Taskbar.  
■ Before removing the Smart Card, confirm that the Smart Card is not  
working with any program or system.  
■ Be careful not to bend the Smart Card while removing it from the  
computer.  
2. Point to Smart Card and click the left Touch Pad control button.  
3. Grasp the Smart Card and remove it.  
Smart Card  
Figure 3-4 Removing a Smart Card  
SD/SDHC memory card  
Set the SD Card type SD memory cards and SDHC memory cards in the  
SD Card slot.  
SD/SDHC memory cards let you easily transfer data from devices, such as  
digital cameras and Personal Digital Assistants, that use SD/SDHC  
memory card flash-memory. The cards have a high level of security and  
copy protection features.  
Keep foreign objects out of the SD Card slot. Never allow metal objects,  
such as screws, staples and paper clips, to enter the computer or  
keyboard. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can  
cause computer damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.  
Points to note about the SD/SDHC memory card  
SD/SDHC memory cards comply with SDMI (Secure Digital Music  
Initiative), which is a technology adopted to prevent unlawful copy or  
playback of digital music. For this reason, you cannot copy or playback  
protected material on another computer or other device, and you may not  
reproduce any copyrighted material except for your personal enjoyment.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-19  
     
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Below is a simple explanation for distinguishing SD memory cards from  
SDHC memory cards.  
■ SD and SDHC memory cards appear the same externally. However, the  
logo on SD and SDHC memory cards is different, so pay careful  
attention to the logo when purchasing.  
■ The SD memory card logo is (  
).  
■ The SDHC memory card logo is (  
).  
■ The maximum capacity of SD memory cards is 2GB. The maximum  
capacity of SDHC memory cards is 16GB.  
Card Type  
Capacities  
SD  
8MB, 16MB, 32MB, 64MB, 128MB, 256MB,  
512MB, 1GB, 2GB  
SDHC  
4GB, 8GB, 16GB  
Inserting an SD/SDHC memory card  
To insert an SD/SDHC memory card, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Insert the SD/SDHC memory card into the SD Card slot on the front of  
the computer.  
2. Press the SD/SDHC memory card gently to ensure a firm connection is  
made.  
SD/SDHC  
memory card  
SD Card slot  
Figure 3-5 Inserting an SD/SDHC memory card  
■ Make sure the SD/SDHC memory card is oriented properly before you  
insert it.  
■ Make sure that the SD/SDHC memory card is facing the correct  
direction when inserting it into the SD Card slot.  
■ Do not turn the computer off or switch to Sleep Mode or Hibernation  
Mode while files are being copied - doing so may cause data to be lost.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-20  
 
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Removing an SD/SDHC memory card  
To remove an SD/SDHC memory card, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Windows Taskbar.  
2. Point to SD Memory Card and click the left Touch Pad control button.  
3. Press the SD/SDHC memory card to partially extend it out of the  
computer.  
4. Grasp the SD/SDHC memory card and remove it.  
SD Card slot  
SD/SDHC memory card  
Figure 3-6 Removing an SD/SDHC memory card  
■ Make sure the SD Card indicator is out before you remove the  
SD/SDHC memory card or turn off the computer’s power. If you remove  
the SD/SDHC memory card or turn off the power while the computer is  
accessing the SD/SDHC memory card you may lose data or damage  
the card.  
■ Do not remove an SD/SDHC memory card while the computer is in  
Sleep or Hibernation Mode. The computer could become unstable or  
data in the SD/SDHC memory card could be lost.  
Formatting an SD/SDHC memory card  
SD/SDHC memory cards are sold already formatted in conformity to  
specific standards. If you format the SD/SDHC memory card again, be sure  
to format it with the TOSHIBA SD Memory Card Format utility, not with the  
format command provided within Windows.  
In order to run the TOSHIBA SD Memory Card Format utility, click Start  
-> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> SD Memory Card Format.  
The TOSHIBA SD Memory Card Format utility does not format the  
protected area of the SD/SDHC memory card - should you need to format  
all areas of the memory card, including the protected area, you will need to  
obtain an appropriate application that applies the copy protection system.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-21  
   
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Media care  
Observe the following precautions when handling the card.  
Card care  
■ Do not twist or bend cards.  
■ Do not expose cards to liquids or store in humid areas or lay media  
close to containers of liquid.  
■ Do not touch the metal part of a card or expose it to liquids or let it get  
dirty.  
■ After using card, return it to its case.  
■ The card is designed so that it can be inserted only one way. Do not try  
to force the card into the slot.  
■ Do not leave a card partially inserted in the slot. Press the card until you  
hear it click into place.  
Memory card care  
■ Set the write-protect switch to the lock position, if you do not want to  
record data.  
■ Memory cards have a limited lifespan, so it is important to backup  
important data.  
■ Do not write to a card if the battery power is low. Low power could affect  
writing accuracy.  
■ Do not remove a card while read/write is in progress.  
For more details on using memory cards, see manuals accompanying the  
cards.  
Additional memory module  
You can install additional memory into the computer in order to increase the  
amount of system memory that is available. This section describes how to  
install and remove optional memory modules.  
■ You should place a mat beneath the computer in order to prevent the  
computer's lid from becoming scratched or damaged when you are  
installing/replacing the memory module. In this instance you should  
avoid mats that are made of materials that hold or generate static  
electricity.  
■ When installing or removing a memory module, you must ensure that  
you do not touch any other internal areas of the computer.  
■ Insert the two memory modules into Slot A and Slot B respectively. The  
computer will operate in dual channel mode.  
You can access the inserted memory modules efficiently in dual  
channel.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-22  
     
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
■ Use only memory modules approved by TOSHIBA.  
■ Do not try to install or remove a memory module under the following  
conditions.  
a. The computer is turned on.  
b. The computer was shut down in either Sleep or Hibernation Mode.  
c. Wake-up on LAN is enabled.  
d. Wake-up on Wireless LAN is enabled.  
e. The wireless communication switch is turned on.  
■ Be careful not to let screws or other foreign matter fall into the  
computer. It could cause malfunction or electric shock.  
■ Additional memory module is a precision electronic component that  
may be fatally damaged by static electricity. Since the human body can  
carry static electricity, it is important that you discharge yourself before  
touching or installing any additional memory modules. To discharge  
your body’s static electricity, simply touch any metal close to you with  
bare hands.  
Point to note about memory module error  
If you install a memory module that is not compatible with the computer, the  
Power indicator will flashes (on for 0.5 seconds, off for 0.5 seconds) in the  
following ways;  
■ If there is an error in only Slot A or no memory module is inserted in Slot  
A: repeatedly flashes orange twice, then green.  
■ If there is an error in Slot B: repeatedly flashes orange, then green  
twice.  
■ If there are errors in both Slot A and Slot B: repeatedly flashes orange  
twice, then green twice.  
In all instances you should shut down the computer and remove the  
incompatible module(s).  
Use a point size 0 Phillips screwdriver to remove and fasten the screws -  
the use of an incorrect screwdriver can damage the screw heads.  
Installing a memory module  
To install a memory module, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Shut down the computer - make sure the Power indicator is off (refer to  
the Turning off the power section in Chapter 1, Getting Started if  
required).  
2. Remove the AC adaptor and all cables and peripherals connected to  
the computer.  
3. Close the display panel.  
4. Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack (refer to  
Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up  
Modes, if required).  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-23  
 
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
5. Loosen the two screws securing the memory module cover in place -  
please note that this screw is attached to the cover in order to prevent it  
from being lost.  
Use a point size 0 Phillips screwdriver.  
6. Slide your fingernail or a thin object under the cover and lift it off.  
Screws  
Memory  
module cover  
Figure 3-7 Removing the memory module cover  
7. Align the notch of the memory module with that of the memory slot and  
gently insert the module into the slot at about a 45 degree angle before  
holding it down until the latches on either side snap into place.  
Slot A  
Notch  
Slot B  
Figure 3-8 Seating the memory module  
■ Never allow metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to  
enter the computer. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit,  
which can cause computer damage and fire, possibly resulting in  
serious injury.  
■ Do not touch the connectors on the memory module or on the  
computer. Debris on the connectors may cause memory access  
problems.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-24  
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
■ The slot A is reserved for the first memory module. Use the slot B for  
expanded memory. If only one module is installed, use the slot A.  
■ Align the grooves along the edges of the memory module with the  
latches on the connector and insert the module into the connector  
firmly - if you find it difficult to install the memory module, gently prise  
the locking tabs outwards using the tip of your finger.  
Please also ensure that you hold the memory module along its left and  
right hand edges - the edges with the grooves in.  
8. Seat the memory module cover in place and secure it with two screws.  
Take care to ensure that the memory module cover is firmly closed.  
Screws  
Memory  
module cover  
Figure 3-9 Seating the memory module cover  
9. Install the battery pack - refer to Replacing the battery pack section in  
Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes, if required.  
10. Turn your computer over.  
11. Turn the computer on and make sure the added memory is recognized -  
to confirm it, Start -> Control Panel -> System and Security  
-> System icon.  
Removing a memory module  
To remove the memory module, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Shut down the computer - make sure the Power indicator is off (refer to  
the Turning off the power section in Chapter 1, Getting Started if  
required).  
2. Remove the AC adaptor and all cables and peripherals connected to  
the computer.  
3. Close the display panel.  
4. Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack (refer to  
Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up  
Modes, if required).  
5. Loosen the two screws securing the memory module cover in place -  
please note that this screw is attached to the cover in order to prevent it  
from being lost.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-25  
 
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
6. Slide your fingernail or a thin object under the cover and lift it off.  
7. Push the latches away from the module in order to release it - a spring  
will force one end of the module up at an angle.  
8. Grasp the module by its edges and remove it from the computer.  
■ If you use the computer for a long time, the memory modules and the  
circuits locating close to the memory modules will become hot. In this  
case, let them cool to room temperature before you replace them. Or  
you will get burnt if you touch any of them.  
■ Do not touch the connectors on the memory module or on the  
computer. Debris on the connectors may cause memory access  
problems.  
Latches  
Figure 3-10 Removing the memory module  
9. Seat the memory module cover in place and secure it with two screws.  
Take care to ensure that the memory module cover is firmly closed.  
10. Install the battery pack - refer to Replacing the battery pack section in  
Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes, if required.  
11. Turn your computer over.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-26  
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
External monitor  
An external analog monitor can be connected to the external monitor port  
on the computer. To connect a monitor, follow the steps as detailed below:  
There are no fastening screws for an external monitor cable on this  
computer's external monitor port. However, external monitor cables which  
have connectors with fastening screws can still be used.  
Connecting the monitor cable  
1. Turn the computer's power off.  
2. Connect the monitor cable to the external monitor port.  
Monitor cable  
External monitor port  
Figure 3-11 Connecting the monitor cable to the external monitor port  
3. Turn the external monitor's power on.  
4. Turn the computer's power on.  
When you turn on the power, the computer will automatically recognize the  
monitor and determine whether it is a color or monochrome device. In the  
event that you find that there are issues getting an image displayed on the  
correct monitor, you should consider using the FN + F5 hot key to change  
the display settings (if you then disconnect the external monitor before you  
turn the computer's power off, be sure to press FN + F5 hot key again to  
switch to the internal display).  
Please refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for further details on using hot  
keys to change the display setting.  
Do not disconnect the external monitor while in Sleep or Hibernation Mode.  
Turn off the computer before disconnecting the external monitor.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-27  
 
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
USB FDD Kit  
The USB floppy diskette drive accommodates either a 1.44MB or 720KB  
floppy diskette and connects to one of the computer's USB ports.  
USB connector  
Disk-In-Use  
Indicator  
Floppy  
diskette slot  
Eject button  
Figure 3-12 The USB floppy diskette drive  
Connecting the USB floppy diskette drive  
To connect the drive, plug the floppy diskette drive’s USB connector into a  
computer’s USB port.  
Make sure the connector is properly aligned with the socket. Do not try to  
force the connection, doing so can damage the connecting pins.  
USB port  
USB connector  
Figure 3-13 Connecting the USB floppy diskette drive  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-28  
 
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
If you connect the USB floppy diskette drive after the computer has already  
been turned on, it will take about ten seconds for it to be recognized by the  
computer. Do not attempt to disconnect and reconnect the drive before this  
period has elapsed.  
Disconnecting the USB floppy diskette drive  
When you have finished using the USB floppy diskette drive, you can follow  
the procedures below in order to disconnect it:  
1. Wait for the Disk-In-Use Indicator light to go out to make sure all floppy  
diskette activity has stopped.  
If you disconnect the USB floppy diskette drive or turn off the power while  
the computer is accessing the drive you may lose data or damage the  
floppy diskette or the drive.  
2. Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Windows Taskbar.  
3. Click the USB floppy diskette drive device that you want to remove.  
4. Carefully pull the floppy diskette drive's USB connector out from within  
the computer's USB port.  
eSATA (External Serial ATA)  
An device corresponding to eSATA function can be connected to the  
eSATA/USB combo port on the computer.  
Connecting the eSATA device  
To connect an eSATA device, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Connect an eSATA cable to the eSATA/USB combo port.  
Make sure the connector is properly aligned with the socket.  
Do not try to force the connection, doing so can damage the connecting  
pins.  
eSATA/USB  
combo port  
eSATA cable  
Figure 3-14 Connecting an eSATA cable to the eSATA/USB combo port  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-29  
 
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
■ A connected eSATA device may not be recognized if it is connected to  
the computer's eSATA/USB combo port while the computer is in Sleep  
Mode or Hibernation Mode. If this occurs, disconnect the eSATA device  
and then reconnect the device while the computer is turned on.  
■ If you connect an eSATA device after the computer has already been  
turned on, it will take about ten seconds for it to be recognized by the  
computer.  
Do not attempt to disconnect and reconnect the drive before this period  
has elapsed.  
Disconnecting an eSATA device  
When you have finished using an eSATA device, you can follow the  
procedures below in order to disconnect it:  
1. Wait for the indicator light of an eSATA device to go out to make sure all  
activity has stopped.  
If you disconnect an eSATA device or turn off the power while the  
computer is accessing the drive you may lose data or damage an eSATA  
device or the drive.  
2. Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Windows Taskbar.  
3. Click an eSATA device that you want to remove.  
4. Carefully pull an eSATA device's eSATA/USB combo connector out  
from within the computer's eSATA/USB combo port.  
TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator  
In addition to the ports available on the computer, the TOSHIBA Express  
Port Replicator provides a DVI port. The TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator  
connects directly to the docking interface on the underside of the computer.  
The AC adaptor connects the TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator to a power  
source.  
The computer must be configured properly before connecting to a LAN.  
Logging onto a LAN using the computer’s default settings could cause a  
malfunction in LAN operation. Check with your LAN administrator  
regarding set-up procedures.  
■ You must connect the AC adaptor before you connect to a TOSHIBA  
Express Port Replicator.  
■ When a TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator is connected to the  
computer, you can not use the following computer’s ports: LAN jack,  
DC IN 15V jack and External monitor port.  
■ When connecting an AC Adaptor to the TOSHIBA Express Port  
Replicator, use only the AC Adaptor included with TOSHIBA Express  
Port Replicator. Do not use the computer’s AC Adaptor.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-30  
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
The following ports are available on the TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator.  
■ RJ45 LAN jack  
■ External monitor port  
■ DC IN 15V jack  
■ Security lock slot  
■ Universal Serial Bus 2.0 port (four)  
■ DVI port  
■ As the port operation of all DVI (Digital Visual Interface) monitors has  
not been confirmed, some DVI monitors may not function properly.  
■ Set the TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator's Slide Adjuster to SLIDE  
position #4 when connecting this computer to the TOSHIBA Express  
Port Replicator. Refer to the TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator User's  
Manual for more details on connection methods.  
Security lock  
A security locks enable you to anchor your computer a desk or other heavy  
object in order to help prevent unauthorized removal or theft. The computer  
has a security lock slot on its left side into which you can attach one end of  
the security cable, while the other end attaches to a desk or similar object.  
The methods used for attaching security cables differ from product to  
product. Please refer to the instructions for the product you are using for  
more information.  
Connecting the security lock  
In order to connect a security cable to the computer, follow the steps as  
detailed below:  
1. Turn the computer so its left hand side faces you.  
2. Align the security cable with the 'lock hole' and secure it in place.  
Security lock slot  
Figure 3-15 Security lock  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-31  
 
Hardware, Utilities and Options  
Optional accessories  
You are able to add a number of options and accessories in order to make  
your computer even more powerful and convenient to use. For reference,  
the following list details some of the items that are available from your  
reseller or TOSHIBA dealer:  
DDR2-800 Memory  
Kit  
A 1,024MB or 2,048MB memory module (DDR2-  
800) can easily be installed in the computer.  
Universal AC  
Adaptor  
If you frequently use your computer at more than  
one site, it may be convenient to purchase an  
additional AC adaptor to be kept at each site in  
order to remove the need to always carry the  
adaptor with you.  
Battery Pack  
An additional battery pack can be purchased for  
use as either a spare or replacement. Please  
refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes  
for further information.  
Slice Expansion  
Battery  
This battery pack increases your computer's  
operating time when a main battery pack is also  
installed. It is connectable to the Docking port of  
the computer.  
Slice Expansion  
Battery adaptor  
The Slice Expansion Battery adaptor is used to  
connect with the Battery Charger in order to  
charge a Slice Expansion Battery.  
Battery Charger  
USB FDD Kit  
The optional battery charger allows you to  
charge extra battery packs outside of having to  
use the computer.  
The USB floppy diskette drive accommodates  
either a 1.44MB or 720KB floppy diskette through  
connection to one of the computer's USB ports.  
In use, please be aware that, while you cannot  
format 720KB floppy diskettes under Windows 7,  
you are able to read and write to diskettes that  
have already been formatted.  
TOSHIBA Express  
Port Replicator  
The TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator provides  
the ports available on the computer in addition to  
a digital visual interface (DVI) port, External  
monitor port, four Universal Serial Bus ports  
(USB 2.0) and a LAN jack.  
Privacy Filter  
By attaching the Privacy Filter to computer you  
can prevent people from "peeking" at your  
screen from the left or right of you.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-32  
           
Chapter 4  
Operating Basics  
This chapter describes the basic operations of your computer, highlights  
the precautions that should be taken when using it.  
Using the Touch Pad  
To use the Touch Pad, simply touch and move your fingertip across it in the  
direction you want the on-screen pointer to go.  
Fingerprint Sensor  
Touch Pad  
control buttons  
Touch Pad  
Figure 4-1 Touch Pad and Touch Pad control buttons  
The two buttons below the Touch Pad are used like the buttons on a  
standard mouse - press the left button to select a menu item or to  
manipulate text or graphics designated by the pointer, and press the right  
button to display a menu or other function depending on the software you  
are using.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-1  
             
Operating Basics  
You can also tap the Touch Pad to perform functions similar to those of the  
left button on a standard mouse.  
Click: Tap once  
Double-click: Tap twice  
Drag and drop: Tap to select the item(s) you want to move, leave your  
finger on the Touch Pad after the second tap and then move the item(s)  
to their new destination.  
Using the Fingerprint Sensor  
This product has a fingerprint utility installed for the purpose of enrolling  
and recognizing fingerprints. By enrolling the ID and password onto the  
fingerprint authentication feature, it is no longer necessary to input the  
password from the keyboard. Fingerprint feature enables you to:  
■ Logon to Windows and access a security enabled homepage through  
Internet Explorer.  
■ Files and folders can be encrypted/decrypted and third party access to  
them prevented.  
■ Disable the password-protected screen-saver when returning from a  
power-saving mode such as Sleep Mode.  
■ Authentication of the User Password (and, if applicable, the HDD(Hard  
Disk Drive) Password) when booting up the computer (Boot  
Authentication).  
■ Single Sign On feature  
Fingerprint cannot be used in models that do not have a fingerprint module  
installed.  
How to Swipe your Finger  
Using the following steps when swiping fingers for fingerprint registration or  
authentication will help to minimize authentication failures:  
Align the first joint of the finger to the center of the sensor. Lightly touch the  
sensor and swipe finger levelly towards you until the sensor surface  
becomes visible. In performing this process, you should also take care to  
ensure that the center of your fingerprint is on the sensor.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-2  
     
Operating Basics  
The following illustrations show the recommended way to swipe your finger  
over the fingerprint sensor.  
Sensor  
Sensor  
Figure 4-2 Swipe the finger  
■ Avoid swiping with your finger stiff or pressed too hard onto the sensor,  
and take care to ensure that the center of the fingerprint is touching the  
sensor before swiping. Either of these conditions may cause fingerprint  
reading to fail.  
■ Check the center of the fingerprint whorl before swiping and then  
ensure this is swiped along the center line of the sensor.  
■ There is a possibility of authentication failures if the finger is swiped too  
quickly or too slowly - follow any on-screen instructions to adjust the  
speed used during the swipe process.  
Points to note about the Fingerprint Sensor  
Please be aware of the following considerations when using the fingerprint  
sensor. A failure to follow these guidelines might result in damage to the  
sensor, sensor failure, fingerprint recognition problems or a lower  
fingerprint recognition success rate.  
■ Do not scratch or poke the sensor with your nails or any hard or sharp  
objects.  
■ Do not press the sensor strongly.  
■ Do not touch the sensor with a wet finger or any wet objects - keep the  
sensor surface dry and free from water vapor.  
■ Do not touch the sensor with a soiled or dirty finger as minute foreign  
particles of dust and dirt may scratch it.  
■ Do not paste stickers or write on the sensor.  
■ Do not touch the sensor with a finger or any other object which may  
have a build-up of static electricity on it.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3  
Operating Basics  
Observe the following before you place your finger on the sensor whether  
for fingerprint enrollment/registration or recognition.  
■ Wash and dry your hands thoroughly.  
■ Remove static electricity from your fingers by touching any metal  
surface. Static electricity is a common cause of sensor failures,  
especially when the weather is dry.  
■ Clean the sensor with a lint-free cloth - do not use detergent or any  
other chemicals to clean the sensor.  
■ Avoid the following finger conditions for enrollment or recognition as  
they may result in fingerprint enrollment errors or a drop in the  
fingerprint recognition success rate  
■ Soaked or swollen finger, for example as may occur after taking a  
bath.  
■ Injured finger  
■ Wet finger  
■ Soiled or oily finger  
■ Extremely dry skin condition on finger  
Observe the following to improve the fingerprint recognition success rate.  
■ Enroll two or more fingers.  
■ Enroll additional fingers if a recognition failure often occurs when using  
already enrolled fingers.  
■ Check the condition of your finger - any conditions which have changed  
since enrollment, such as injury, rough skin, and extremely dry, wet,  
soiled, dirty, oily, soaked or swollen fingers, may lower the recognition  
success rate. Also if the fingerprint is worn down or the finger becomes  
thinner or fatter, the recognition success rate may be lowered.  
■ As the fingerprint for each finger is different and unique you should  
ensure that only the registered or enrolled fingerprint or fingerprints are  
used for identification.  
■ Check the position and speed at which you swipe your finger across the  
sensor - please refer to the preceding drawing.  
■ The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes the unique  
characteristics in a fingerprint. However, there may be instances where  
certain users are unable to register their fingerprints due to insufficient  
unique characteristics in their fingerprints.  
■ The recognition success rate may differ from user to user.  
Points to note about the Fingerprint utility  
■ If Windows 7 file encryption function EFS (Encryption File System) is  
used to encrypt a file, the file cannot be further encrypted using the  
encryption function of this software.  
■ You can back up the fingerprint data or the information registered to  
Automatic password input in IE.  
■ You can use Import/Export on TOSHIBA Fingperprint Utility main menu.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-4  
Operating Basics  
■ Please also refer to the fingerprint utility Help file for more information.  
You can start it using the following method:  
■ Click Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> TOSHIBA  
Fingerprint Utility. The main screen is displayed. Click ? in the  
lower left corner of the screen.  
Fingerprint utility limitations  
TOSHIBA does not guarantee that the fingerprint utility technology will be  
completely secure or error-free, or that it will accurately screen out  
unauthorized users at all times. TOSHIBA is not liable for any failure or  
damage that might arise out of the use of the fingerprint software.  
■ The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes the unique  
characteristics in a fingerprint. However, there may be instances where  
certain users are unable to register their fingerprints due to insufficient  
unique characteristics in their fingerprints.  
■ The recognition success rate may differ from user to user.  
Setup Fingerprint Registration  
Please use the following procedure when first using fingerprint  
authentication.  
■ The fingerprint authentication uses the same Windows logon ID and  
password. If the Windows logon password has not been setup, please  
do so before registration.  
■ This sensor has the memory space for at least 20 fingerprint patterns.  
You might be able to register more fingerprint patterns depending on  
the sensor memory usage.  
1. Click Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> TOSHIBA  
Fingerprint Utility, or click the utility icon in the Task Bar.  
2. The Enroll screen is displayed. Enter the current account password  
into the Windows Password field. If no Windows password had been  
configured, you will be asked to configure the new logon password.  
then click Next.  
3. Click the non-enrolled finger icon above the finger you want to register  
and then click Next.  
4. The note for enrollment operation screen is displayed. Confirm the  
message and then click Next.  
5. The scanning practice screen is displayed. You are able to practice  
swiping (three times) your finger to ensure you use the correct method.  
When you have finished practicing swiping your finger, click Next.  
6. Swipe three times with the same finger. If scanning of fingerprint  
succeeds, "Enrollment succeed! Do you want to save this  
fingerprint?" message box will appear, click OK.  
7. The following message will be displayed: "It is Strongly  
recommended you enroll one more fingerprint." Click OK  
and repeat steps 3, 4, 5 and 6 with another finger.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-5  
Operating Basics  
■ It is strongly recommended that you register 2 or more fingerprints.  
■ You cannot enroll the same fingerprint more than once, even on a  
different user account.  
Delete the Fingerprint Data  
Saved fingerprint data is stored in special non-volatile memory inside the  
fingerprint sensor. Therefore, if you give the computer to someone else, or  
dispose of it in any way, the following process is recommended to delete  
your fingerprint information:  
Delete the fingerprint data for the currently logged in user.  
1. Click Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> TOSHIBA  
Fingerprint Utility, or click the utility icon in the Task Bar.  
2. Swipe your finger across the fingerprint sensor.  
3. The TOSHIBA Fingerprint Utility main menu is displayed. Select  
Enroll in the main menu.  
4. In the Enroll window, it enable you to delete the fingerprint data for the  
currently logged in user. Click an enrolled finger you want to delete,  
"Are you sure you want to delete this fingerprint  
template?" message box will appear on the screen, click OK.  
If you want to delete the other fingerprints, repeat this step.  
If only one fingerprint is registered, the message "Sorry! At least  
one fingerprint is required." will appear after clicking OK.  
You are not allowed to delete a unique fingerprint.  
5. Click Close.  
6. "Are you sure you want to quit" is displayed. Click OK. It will  
be returned to the TOSHIBA Fingerprint Utility main menu.  
Delete all users fingerprints  
1. In the TOSHIBA Fingerprint Utility main menu, click Run as  
administrator in the lower left.  
2. User Account Control window is displayed. Click Yes.  
3. Swipe your enrolled finger.  
4. Select Fingerprint Control option.  
5. A list of fingerprint information for all the users is shown in the screen.  
Click Delete All in the lower right.  
6. "Are you sure you want to delete all fingerprints?"  
message box will appear on the screen, click OK.  
7. Click Close.  
8. "Are you sure you want to quit" is displayed. Click OK. It will  
be returned to the TOSHIBA Fingerprint Utility main menu.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-6  
Operating Basics  
Windows Logon via Fingerprint Authentication  
In place of the usual Windows logon by ID and password, fingerprint  
authentication also allows logon to Windows.  
This is useful especially when many users are using the computer, as user  
selection can be skipped.  
Fingerprint Authentication Procedure  
1. Start up the computer.  
2. The Logon Authorization screen is displayed. Choose any of the  
enrolled fingers and swipe the fingerprint on the sensor. If  
authentication is successful, the user will be logged on to Windows.  
■ If the fingerprint authentication fails, please logon using the Windows  
logon password.  
■ Please logon using the Windows logon password if the fingerprint  
authentication failed for five times. To logon using the Windows logon  
password, enter the Windows logon password at the [Welcome] screen  
as normal.  
■ A warning message will be displayed when authentication is abnormal  
or authentication is not successful within a fixed duration.  
Fingerprint Boot Authentication and Single Sign-on feature  
overview about fingerprint boot authentication  
The fingerprint authentication system can be used to replace the keyboard  
based User Password authentication system when booting up.  
If you do not want to use the fingerprint authentication system for password  
authentication when booting up, but prefer to use the keyboard-based  
system instead, click the user's tile when the Fingerprint System  
Authentication screen is displayed. This will switch the password input  
screen to the keyboard-based one.  
■ It is necessary to register the User Password before using the  
fingerprint boot authentication feature and its extended function, the  
fingerprint Single sign-on feature. Please use TOSHIBA HW Setup to  
register the User Password.  
■ If you fail fingerprint authentication more than five times, you must  
enter the User Password or Supervisor Password manually to start the  
computer.  
■ When swiping, please do it slowly and at a constant speed. If this does  
not improve the authentication rate, please adjust the speed.  
■ If there are any changes in the environment or settings related to  
authorization, you will be required to provide authorization information  
such as a User Password and HDD password.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-7  
Operating Basics  
Overview about Fingerprint Single Sign-on feautre  
This is a feature that allows the user to complete the authentication for both  
the User/BIOS Password (and, if applicable, the HDD (Hard Disk Drive)  
Password) and logging onto Windows using only one fingerprint  
authentication when booting up.  
It is necessary to register the User/BIOS Password and Windows Logon  
Password before using the fingerprint boot authentication and this  
fingerprint Single sign-on feature. Please use the TOSHIBA Password  
Utility to register your User/BIOS Password. If Windows Logon is not the  
default for your system, see Manual to register your Windows Logon  
Password.  
Only one fingerprint authentication is required to replace the User/BIOS  
Password (and, if applicable, the HDD(Hard Disk Drive) Password) and the  
Windows Logon Password.  
How to Enable Fingerprint Boot Authentication and Single  
Sign-On Feature  
It is necessary to first enroll your fingerprint with the TOSHIBA Fingerprint  
Utility prior to enabling and configuring the boot authentication and Single  
Sign-On feature. You should check that your fingerprint is enrolled before  
configuring the settings.  
1. Logon as Administrator (means a user has administrator privileges).  
2. Click Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> TOSHIBA  
Fingerprint Utility.  
3. Swipe your finger across the fingerprint sensor.  
4. The TOSHIBA Fingerprint Utility main menu is displayed. Click Run  
As Administrator in lower left.  
5. User Account Control window is displayed. Click Yes.  
6. Swipe your finger across the fingerprint sensor.  
7. Select Setting in the main menu to open the Setting window, you can  
■ Select Boot authentication check box if you want to use the  
fingerprint boot authentication feature.  
■ Select Boot authentication and Single sign-on check boxes if you  
want to use the Single sign-on feature.  
8. Click Apply.  
9. "Save succeeded" is displayed. Click OK.  
10. Click Close.  
11. "Are you sure you want to quit" is displayed. Click OK. It will  
be returned to the TOSHIBA Fingerprint Utility main menu.  
The modified configuration for fingerprint boot authentication and Single  
sign-on feature becomes effective the next time the system is booted up.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-8  
Operating Basics  
Web Camera  
Web Camera is a device that allows you to record video or take  
photographs with your computer. You can use it for video chatting or video  
conferences using a communication tool such as Windows Live  
Messenger. TOSHIBA Web Camera Application will help you to add  
various video effects to your video or photograph.  
Enables the transmission of video and use of video chat via the internet  
using specialized applications.  
The effective pixel count for this web camera is 0.3 million (maximum  
photograph size: 640x480 pixels).  
Some models are equipped with a Web Camera.  
Please refer to the Web Camera Application Online Help for details.  
Web Camera  
LED  
Web Camera  
Figure 4-3 Web Camera  
■ Do not point the web camera directly at the sun.  
■ Do not touch or press strongly on the web camera lens. Doing so may  
reduce image quality. Use an eyeglass cleaner (cleaner cloth) or other  
soft cloth to clean the lens if it becomes dirty.  
■ Setting the [Size] to more than "640x480" will cause a larger amount of  
data to be written to the hard disk drive and may interfere with smooth  
recording.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-9  
     
Operating Basics  
Using the TOSHIBA Face Recognition  
TOSHIBA Face Recognition uses a face verification library to verify the  
face data of users when they log in to Windows. The user can thus avoid  
having to enter a password or the like, which makes the login process  
easier.  
Some models are equipped with a TOSHIBA Face Recognition.  
■ TOSHIBA Face Recognition does not guarantee the correct  
identification of a user. Changes to the likeness of a registrant, such as  
hair style changes, wearing a cap, or wearing glasses may effect the  
recognition rates when such changes occur after the registrant had  
registered.  
■ TOSHIBA Face Recognition may incorrectly recognize faces that are  
similar to a registrant.  
■ For high security purposes, TOSHIBA Face Recognition is not a  
suitable substitute for Windows passwords. When security is a high  
priority, use your established Windows passwords to log in.  
■ Bright background light and/or shadows may prevent a registrant from  
being recognized correctly. In that case, log in using your Windows  
password. If recognition of a registrant fails repeatedly, refer to your  
computer documentation to learn ways to improve recognition  
performance.  
■ TOSHIBA Face Recognition records face data in a log when face  
recognition fails. When transferring ownership or disposing of your  
computer, please uninstall the application or delete all the logs created  
by the application. For details on how to do this, see help file.  
■ TOSHIBA Face Recognition can be used only in Windows 7.  
Disclaimer  
Toshiba does not guarantee that the face recognition utility technology will  
be completely secure or error-free. Toshiba does not guarantee that the  
face recognition utility will accurately screen out unauthorized users at all  
times. Toshiba is not liable for any failure or damage that might arise out of  
the use of the face recognition software or utility.  
TOSHIBA, ITS AFFILIATES AND SUPPLIERS SHALL HAVE NO  
RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGE TO OR LOSS OF ANY BUSINESS,  
PROFITS, PROGRAMS, DATA, NETWORK SYSTEMS OR REMOVABLE  
STORAGE MEDIA ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM THE USE  
OF THE PRODUCT, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY  
THEREOF.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-10  
 
Operating Basics  
How to register the Face Recognition Data  
Take a picture for facial verification purposes, and register the data needed  
when you log in. To register the data needed when you log in, follow the  
steps as described below:  
1. To launch this utility, click Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA ->  
Utilities -> Face Recognition.  
■ The Registration screen is displayed for a logged-in user whose  
face has not been registered.  
■ The Management screen is displayed for a logged-in user whose  
face has already been registered.  
2. Click Run as administrator in lower left of the Management screen,  
and then click the Register button. The Registration screen is  
displayed.  
■ If you wish to practice, click on the Next button in the Registration  
screen.  
■ If you do not wish to practice, click on the Skip button in the  
Registration screen.  
3. Click the Next button to start the guide. Follow the guide to practice.  
■ Click the Back button to practice the guide once more.  
4. Click the Next button to start image-capturing process.  
Adjust the position of your face so that it fits within the face-shaped  
frame.  
5. Once your face has been positioned properly, the recording will  
commence.  
Start moving your neck very slightly to the left and right, and then move  
your neck down and up.  
6. Registration will end after you have repeatedly moved your neck left,  
right, down and up.  
When the register succeeds, below message will be displayed on the  
screen:  
" Registration successful. Now we’ll do the  
verification test. Click the Next button.".  
Click the Next button to perform the verification test.  
7. Perform the verification test. Face the screen as you do when you  
register.  
■ If verification fails, click the Back button and re-register. Please refer  
to step 6 from step 4.  
8. If verification is successful, click the Next button and register an  
account.  
9. Register the account.  
Fill in all the fields.  
10. The Management screen is displayed.  
The registered account name will be displayed. Clicking on it will cause  
the captured image of your face to be displayed on the left.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-11  
Operating Basics  
How to Delete the Face Recognition Data  
Delete image data, account information, and personal record data created  
during registration. To delete the Face Recognition Data, follow the steps  
as described below:  
1. To launch this utility, click Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA ->  
Utilities -> Face Recognition.  
The Management screen is displayed.  
2. Select a user which is displayed in the Management screen.  
3. Click the Delete button. "You are about to delete the user  
data. Would you like to continue?" will be displayed on the  
screen.  
■ If you do not want the data to be deleted, click the No button and  
you will then be returned to the Management screen.  
■ Clicking on the Yes button will remove the selected user from the  
Management screen.  
How to launch the help file  
For further information on this utility, please refer to help file.  
1. To launch the help file, click Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA ->  
Utilities -> Face Recognition Help.  
Windows Logon via TOSHIBA Face Recognition  
This section explains how to login to Windows with TOSHIBA Face  
Recognition. Two authentication modes are provided.  
■ AUTO Mode Login screen : If the face authentication tile is selected by  
default, you can log in without using the keyboard or mouse.  
■ 1:1 Mode Login screen : This mode is essentially the same as AUTO  
mode, but the Select Account screen will appear before the Display  
Captured Image screen, and you will need to select the user account  
to be authenticated in order to start the authentication process.  
AUTO Mode Login screen  
1. Turn on the computer.  
2. The Select Tiles screen will be displayed.  
3. Select Start face recognition (  
).  
4. "Please face the camera" will be displayed.  
5. Verification will be performed. If the authentication is successful, the  
image data taken in step 4 will be faded in and placed over one another.  
■ If an error occurs during authentication, you will be returned to the  
Select Tiles screen.  
6. The Windows Welcome screen will be displayed, and will be logged in  
automatically to Windows.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-12  
Operating Basics  
1:1 Mode Login screen  
1. Turn on the computer.  
2. The Select Tiles screen will be displayed.  
3. Select Start face recognition (  
).  
4. The Select Account screen will be displayed.  
5. Select the account, and click the arrow button.  
6. "Please face the camera" will be displayed.  
7. Verification will be performed. If the authentication is successful, the  
image data taken in step 6 will be faded in and placed over one another.  
■ If an error occurs during authentication, you will be returned to the  
Select Tiles screen.  
8. The Windows Welcome screen will be displayed, and will be logged in  
automatically to Windows.  
■ If authentication was successful, but an authentication error  
subsequently occurred during the login to Windows, you will be  
asked to provide your account information.  
Using optical disc drives  
The full-size drive provides high-performance execution of CD/DVD-ROM-  
based programs. You can run either 12 cm (4.72") or 8 cm (3.15")  
CD/DVDs without an adaptor. A Serial ATA interface controller is used for  
CD/DVD-ROM operation. When the computer is accessing a CD/DVD-  
ROM, an indicator on the drive glows.  
Use the DVD playback application to view DVD-Video discs.  
If you have a DVD Super Multi drive, refer also to the Writing CD/DVDs on  
DVD Super Multi drives section for precautions on writing to CDs/DVDs.  
When the power of the optical disc drive is off, pressing the FN + Tab keys  
will turn the power of the optical disc drive on. Furthermore, it is possible to  
set it to turn the power of the optical disc drive on and eject the tray at the  
same time.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-13  
     
Operating Basics  
Loading discs  
To load CD/DVDs, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. When the computer’s power is on, press the eject button to open  
the disc tray slightly.  
2. Grasp the disc tray gently and pull until it is fully opened.  
Eject button  
Disc tray  
Figure 4-4 Pressing the eject button and pulling the disc tray open  
3. Lay the CD/DVD, label side up, in the disc tray.  
Laser lens  
Figure 4-5 Inserting a CD/DVD  
When the disc tray is fully opened, the edge of the computer will extend  
slightly over the CD/DVD tray. Therefore, you will need to turn the CD/DVD  
at an angle when you place it in the disc tray. After seating the CD/DVD,  
however, make sure it lies flat.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-14  
Operating Basics  
■ Do not touch the laser lens or any portion of its surrounding casing as  
this could cause misalignment.  
■ Prevent foreign objects from entering the drive. Check the surface of  
the disc tray, especially the area behind the front edge of the disc tray,  
to make sure there are no such objects before closing the drive.  
4. Press gently at the center of the CD/DVD until you feel it click into  
place. The CD/DVD should lie below the top of the spindle, flush with  
the spindle base.  
5. Push the center of the disc tray to close it. Press gently until it locks into  
place.  
If the CD/DVD is not seated properly when the disc tray is closed, the  
CD/DVD might be damaged. Also, the disc tray might not open fully when  
you press the eject button.  
Figure 4-6 Closing the CD/DVD disc tray  
Removing discs  
To remove the CD/DVD, follow the steps as detailed below:  
Do not press the eject button while the computer is accessing the media  
drive. Wait for the optical disc drive indicator to go out before you open the  
disc tray. Also, if the CD/DVD is spinning when you open the disc tray, wait  
for it to stop before you remove it.  
1. To pop the disc tray partially open, press the eject button. Gently pull  
the disc tray out until it is fully opened.  
When the disc tray pops open slightly, wait a moment to make sure the  
CD/DVD has stopped spinning before pulling the disc tray fully open.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-15  
Operating Basics  
2. The CD/DVD extends slightly over the sides of the disc tray so you can  
grasp it. Gently lift out the CD/DVD.  
Figure 4-7 Removing a CD/DVD  
3. Push the center of the disc tray to close it. Press gently until it locks into  
place.  
How to remove CD/DVD when the disc tray will not open  
Pressing the eject button will not open the disc tray when the computer  
power is off. If the power is off, you can open the disc tray by inserting a  
slender object (about 15 mm) such as a straightened paper clip into the  
eject hole near the eject button.  
Eject hole  
Figure 4-8 Manual release with the eject hole  
Turn off the power before you use the eject hole. If the CD/DVD is spinning  
when you open the disc tray, the CD/DVD could fly off the spindle and  
cause injury.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-16  
Operating Basics  
Writing CD/DVDs on DVD Super Multi drives  
You can use the DVD Super Multi drive to write data to either CD-R, CD-  
RW, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double  
Layer), DVD+RW or DVD-RAM discs. The TOSHIBA Disc Creator is  
provided as writing software with this computer.  
■ Please refer to the Writable discs, Chapter 2 for details about the types  
of writable CD and DVD discs that can be supported by this computer.  
■ Do not turn off the power to the optical disc drive while the computer is  
accessing it as this may cause you to lose data.  
■ To write data to CD-R/-RW media, use the TOSHIBA Disc Creator  
feature that is installed on your computer.  
■ When the power of the optical disc drive is off, the disc tray will not  
open even if the eject button is pushed. Use the ODD to turn the power  
of the optical disc drive on. Please refer to Chapter 5, Hot keys.  
When writing information to media using an optical drive, you should  
always ensure that you connect the AC adaptor to a live power socket. It is  
possible that, if data is written while powered by the battery pack, the write  
process may sometimes fail due to low battery power - in these instances  
data loss may occur.  
Important message  
Before you write or rewrite to any of the media supported by the DVD  
Super Multi Drive, please read and follow all of the setup and operating  
instructions in this section. If you fail to do so, you may find that the DVD  
Super Multi drive may not function properly, and you may fail to write or  
rewrite information successfully - this may cause you to either lose data or  
incur other damage to the drive or media.  
Disclaimer  
TOSHIBA does not bear responsibility for the following:  
■ Damage to any CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW,  
DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer), DVD+RW or DVD-RAM disc that may  
be caused by writing or rewriting with this product.  
■ Any change or loss of the recorded contents of CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R,  
DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer),  
DVD+RW or DVD-RAM media that may be caused by writing or  
rewriting with this product, or for any business profit loss or business  
interruption that may be caused by the change or loss of the recorded  
contents.  
■ Damage that may be caused by using third party equipment or  
software.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-17  
   
Operating Basics  
Given the technological limitations of current optical disc writing drives, you  
may experience unexpected writing or rewriting errors due to disc quality or  
problems with hardware devices. In view of this, it is good practice to make  
two or more copies of important data, in case of any undesired change or  
loss of the recorded contents.  
Before writing or rewriting  
■ Based on TOSHIBA's limited compatibility testing, we suggest the  
following manufacturers of CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual  
Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer), DVD+RW or DVD-  
RAM media, however, it must be noted that disc quality can affect write  
or rewrite success rates. Please also be aware that in no event does  
TOSHIBA guarantee the operation, quality or performance of any disc.  
CD-R:  
TAIYO YUDEN CO., Ltd.  
MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD.  
Ricoh Co., Ltd.  
Hitachi Maxell,Ltd.  
CD-RW: (Multi-Speed and High-Speed)  
MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD.  
Ricoh Co., Ltd.  
CD-RW: (Ultra-Speed)  
MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD.  
DVD-R:  
DVD Specifications for Recordable Disc for General Version 2.0  
TAIYO YUDEN Co.,Ltd. (for 8x and 16x speed media)  
MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD. (for 4x, 8x and 16x speed  
media)  
Hitachi Maxell,Ltd. (for 8x and 16x speed media)  
DVD-R (Dual Layer):  
MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD. (for 4x and 8x speed media)  
DVD+R:  
MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD. (for 8x and 16x speed  
media)  
Ricoh Co., Ltd. (for 8x and 16x speed media)  
TAIYO YUDEN CO., Ltd. (for 8x and 16x speed media)  
DVD+R (Double Layer):  
MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD. (for 2.4x and 8x speed  
media)  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-18  
Operating Basics  
DVD-RW:  
DVD Specifications for Recordable Disc for Version 1.1 or version  
1.2  
Victor Company of Japan, Ltd. (JVC) (for 2x, 4x and 6x speed media)  
MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD. (for 2x, 4x and 6x speed  
media)  
DVD+RW:  
Ricoh Co., Ltd. (for 2.4x, 4x and 8x speed media)  
MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD. (for 2.4x, 4x and 8x speed  
media)  
DVD-RAM:  
DVD Specifications for DVD-RAM Disc for Version 2.0, Version 2.1  
or Version 2.2  
Panasonic Co.,LTD. (for 3x and 5x speed media)  
Hitachi Maxell,Ltd. (for 3x and 5x speed media)  
■ DVD Super Multi drive cannot use discs that allow writing faster than  
16x speed (DVD-R and DVD+R media), 8x speed (DVD-R (Dual  
Layer), DVD+RW and DVD+R (Double Layer) media), 6x speed (DVD-  
RW media), 5x speed (DVD-RAM media).  
■ Some types and formats of DVD-R (Dual Layer) and DVD+R (Double  
Layer) discs may be unreadable.  
■ 2.6GB and 5.2GB DVD-RAM media cannot be read from or written to.  
■ DISC created in DVD-R (Dual Layer) format4 (Layer Jump Recording)  
cannot be read.  
■ If the disc is poor in quality, or is dirty or damaged, writing or rewriting  
errors may be noted - ensure that you check all discs for dirt or damage  
before you use them.  
■ The actual number of rewrites to CD-RW, DVD-RW, DVD+RW or DVD-  
RAM media will be affected by the quality of the disc itself and the way  
in which it is used.  
■ There are two types of DVD-R media available, authoring discs and  
general use discs. Do not attempt to use authoring discs as only  
general use discs can be written to by a computer drive.  
■ You can use both DVD-RAM discs that can be removed from a cartridge  
and DVD-RAM discs designed without a cartridge.  
■ You may find that other computer DVD-ROM drives or other DVD  
players may not be able to read DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW,  
DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW discs.  
■ Data written to a CD-R, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD+R or  
DVD+R (Double Layer) discs cannot be deleted either in whole or in  
part.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-19  
Operating Basics  
■ Data deleted/erased from a CD-RW, DVD-RW, DVD+RW or DVD-RAM  
disc cannot be recovered. You must check the content of the disc  
carefully before you delete it, taking care that, if multiple drives that can  
write data to discs are connected, you do not delete data from the  
wrong one.  
■ In writing to DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R  
(Double Layer), DVD+RW or DVD-RAM media, some space is required  
for file management, so you may not be able to write to the full capacity  
of the disc.  
■ Since the disc is based on the DVD standard, it might be filled with  
dummy data if the written data is less than about 1GB. Therefore, in  
these circumstance, even if you write only a small amount of data, it  
might take additional time to fill in the dummy data.  
■ When multiple drives that can write data to discs are connected, be  
sure that you do not write to or delete data from the wrong drive.  
■ Be sure to connect the AC adaptor to the computer before you write or  
rewrite any information.  
■ Before you enter either Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode, take care to  
ensure that any DVD-RAM writing has been completed. In this instance,  
writing is finished if you can eject the DVD-RAM media.  
■ Be sure to close all other software programs except for the writing  
software itself.  
■ Do not run software such as a screen saver which can put a heavy load  
on the processor.  
■ Operate the computer at its full power settings - do not use any power-  
saving features.  
■ Do not write information while virus checking software is running,  
instead wait for it to finish, then disable the virus protection applications,  
including any software that checks files automatically in the  
background.  
■ Do not use any hard disk utilities, including those that are intended to  
enhance hard disk drive access speeds, as they may cause unstable  
operation and damage data.  
■ CD-RW (Ultra Speed +) media should not be used as data may be lost  
or damaged.  
■ You should always write from the computer's hard disk drive onto the  
CD/DVD - do not try to write from shared devices such as a server or  
any other network device.  
■ Writing with software other than TOSHIBA Disc Creator has not been  
confirmed, therefore operation with other software applications cannot  
be guaranteed.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-20  
Operating Basics  
When writing or rewriting  
Please observe the following points while you write or rewrite data to CD-R,  
CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double  
Layer), DVD+RW or DVD-RAM media:  
■ Always copy data from the hard disk drive to the optical media - do not  
use the cut-and-paste function as the original data will be lost if there is  
a write error.  
■ Do not perform any of the following actions:  
■ Change users in the Windows 7 operating system.  
■ Operate the computer for any other function, including such tasks as  
using a mouse or Touch Pad, or closing/opening the display panel.  
■ Start a communication application such as a modem.  
■ Apply impact or vibration to the computer.  
■ Install, remove or connect external devices, including such items as  
an ExpressCard, SD/SDHC memory card, miniSD/microSD Card,  
Smart Card, USB device, external monitor or an optical digital  
device.  
■ Use the audio/video control button to reproduce music or voice.  
■ Open the optical disc drive.  
■ Do not use shut down, log off, Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode  
functions while writing or rewriting.  
■ Make sure that the write/rewrite operation is completed before going  
into either Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode (writing is completed if you  
can remove an optical media on the DVD Super Multi drive).  
■ If the media is of poor quality, or is dirty or damaged, writing or rewriting  
errors may occur.  
■ Set the computer on a level surface and avoid places subject to  
vibration such as airplanes, trains or cars. In addition, do not use the  
computer on an unstable surface such as a stand.  
■ Keep mobile phones and other wireless communication devices away  
from the computer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-21  
Operating Basics  
TOSHIBA Disc Creator  
Please be aware of the following limitations when you use the TOSHIBA  
Disc Creator:  
■ DVD Video cannot be created using TOSHIBA Disc Creator.  
■ DVD Audio cannot be created using TOSHIBA Disc Creator.  
■ You cannot use TOSHIBA Disc Creator's 'Audio CD for Car or Home  
CD Player' function to record music to DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer),  
DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW media.  
■ Do not use the 'Disc Backup' function of TOSHIBA Disc Creator in order  
to copy DVD Video or DVD-ROM material that has copyright protection.  
■ DVD-RAM discs cannot be backed up using the 'Disc Backup' function  
of TOSHIBA Disc Creator.  
■ You cannot back up CD-ROM, CD-R or CD-RW media to DVD-R, DVD-  
R (Dual Layer) or DVD-RW media using the 'Disc Backup' function of  
TOSHIBA Disc Creator.  
■ You cannot back up CD-ROM, CD-R or CD-RW media to DVD+R,  
DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW media using the 'Disc Backup'  
function of TOSHIBA Disc Creator.  
■ You cannot back up DVD-ROM, DVD Video, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual  
Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW to CD-  
R or CD-RW media using the 'Disc Backup' function of TOSHIBA Disc  
Creator.  
■ TOSHIBA Disc Creator cannot record in packet format.  
■ You might not be able to use the 'Disc Backup' function of TOSHIBA  
Disc Creator to back up a DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW,  
DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW disc that was made with  
other software on a different optical media recorder.  
■ If you add data to a DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD+R or DVD+R  
(Double Layer) disc that you have already recorded to, you might not be  
able to read the added data under some circumstances. For example, it  
cannot be read under 16-bit operating systems, such as Windows 98SE  
and Windows Me, while in Windows NT4 you will need Service Pack 6  
or later, and in Windows 2000, you will need Service Pack 2. In addition  
to this, some DVD-ROM and DVD-ROM / CD-R/RW drives cannot read  
this added data regardless of the operating system.  
■ TOSHIBA Disc Creator does not support recording to DVD-RAM discs -  
to achieve this you should use Windows Explorer or another similar  
utility.  
■ When you back up a DVD disc, be sure that the source drive supports  
recording to DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R  
(Double Layer) or DVD+RW media - if this is not the case then the  
source disc might not be backed up correctly.  
■ When you back up a DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R,  
DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW disc, be sure to use the same type  
of disc.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-22  
 
Operating Basics  
■ You cannot partially delete any data written to a CD-RW, DVD-RW or  
DVD+RW disc.  
Data Verification  
To verify that data has been written or rewritten correctly to a data CD/DVD  
you should follow the steps below before you begin the write/rewrite  
process:  
1. Display the setting dialog box by one of the following two steps:  
■ Click the Recording settings button (  
) for writing on the main  
toolbar in the Data CD/DVD mode.  
■ Select Settings for Each Mode -> Data CD/DVD in the Settings  
menu.  
2. Mark the Verify Written Data check box.  
3. Select File Open or Full Compare mode.  
4. Click the OK button.  
How to learn more about TOSHIBA Disc Creator  
Please refer to the Help files for additional TOSHIBA Disc Creator  
information.  
TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER  
This software is provided for playback of DVD Video.  
It has an on-screen interface and functions. Click Start -> All Programs  
-> TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER -> TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER.  
For details on how to use TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER, see the help file.  
Please be aware of the following limitations when you use the TOSHIBA  
DVD PLAYER:  
Notes on use  
■ Frame dropping, audio skipping or out of synch audio and video may  
occur during playback of some DVD Video titles.  
■ Close all other applications when using the “TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER”.  
Do not open any other applications or carry out any other operations  
during DVD Video playback. Playback may stop or not function properly  
in some situations.  
■ Unfinalized DVDs created on home DVD recorders may not be playable  
on the computer.  
■ Use DVD-Video discs with a region code which is either "the same as  
the factory default setting" or "ALL".  
■ The resume function cannot be used with some discs on the "TOSHIBA  
DVD PLAYER".  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-23  
   
Operating Basics  
■ It is recommended the AC adaptor be connected when playing DVD-  
Video. Power saving features may interfere with smooth playback.  
When playing DVD-Video using battery power, set the Power Options to  
"High performance".  
■ Screen savers will not display while playing a movie in the "TOSHIBA  
DVD PLAYER". The computer will also not go into Sleep Mode,  
Hibernation Mode or shutdown while using "TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER".  
■ Do not configure the Display automatic power off function to run while  
the "TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER" is running.  
■ Do not switch to Hibernation or Sleep Mode when running the  
"TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER".  
■ Do not lock the computer using the Windows logo ( ) + L keys or the  
Fn + F1 keys when running the "TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER".  
Media care  
This section provides tips on protecting data stored on your CD's, DVD's  
and floppy diskettes. Handle your media with care. Following the simple  
precautions listed below will increase the lifetime of your media and protect  
the data stored on it.  
CD/DVDs  
1. Store your CD's and DVD's in the containers they originally came in to  
protect them and keep them clean.  
2. Do not bend the CD's or DVD's.  
3. Do not write on, apply a sticker to, or otherwise mar the surface of the  
CD or DVD that contains the data.  
4. Hold the CD or DVD by its outside edge or the edge on the center hole -  
any fingerprints on the surface of the disc can prevent the drive from  
properly reading data.  
5. Do not expose the CD or DVD to direct sunlight, extreme heat or cold.  
6. Do not place heavy objects on your CD's or DVD's.  
7. If your CD's or DVD's become dusty or dirty, wipe them with a clean dry  
cloth from the center hole outwards - do not wipe in a circular direction.  
If necessary, you can use a cloth that has been lightly dampened in  
water or a neutral cleaner but you must not use benzine, thinner or any  
similar cleaning solution.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-24  
       
Operating Basics  
Floppy diskettes  
The USB floppy diskette drive is available only as an option.  
1. Store your floppy diskettes in the container they came in to protect them  
and keep them clean. If a floppy diskette becomes dirty, clean it with a  
soft, lightly dampened cloth - do not use cleaning fluid.  
2. Never open the shutter or touch the magnetic surface of your floppy  
diskette - doing this could permanently damage it and lose data.  
3. Always handle floppy diskettes with care to prevent the loss of stored  
data.  
4. Always apply the floppy diskette label in the correct location and never  
apply a new label on top of an existing one - in this instance the label  
could come loose and damage the floppy diskette drive.  
5. Never use a pencil for writing on a floppy diskette label as the dust from  
the pencil lead could cause a system malfunction if it found its way onto  
the computer's components. In this instance, always use a felt-tipped  
pen and write the label first before applying it to the floppy diskette.  
6. Never put a floppy diskette in a location where water or other liquid may  
make contact with it, or where it is excessively damp - either of these  
conditions could cause data loss.  
7. Never use a wet or damp floppy diskette - this could damage the floppy  
diskette drive or other devices within the computer.  
8. Data may be lost if the floppy diskette is twisted, bent, or exposed to  
direct sunlight, extreme heat or cold.  
9. Do not place heavy objects on your floppy diskettes.  
10. Do not eat, smoke, or use items such as erasers near your floppy  
diskettes as foreign particles inside the jacket of the floppy diskette can  
damage the magnetic surface.  
11. Magnetic energy can destroy the data on your floppy diskettes. In view  
of this you should keep your floppy diskettes away from speakers,  
radios, televisions and other sources of magnetic fields.  
Sound System  
This section describes some of the audio control functions.  
Volume Mixer  
The Volume Mixer utility lets you control the audio volume for playback of  
devices and applications under Windows.  
■ To launch the Volume Mixer utility, right click on the speaker icon on the  
Taskbar, and select Open Volume Mixer from the sub menu.  
■ To adjust the volume level of speakers or headphones, move the  
Speakers slider.  
■ To adjust the volume level of an application that you are using, move  
the slider for the corresponding application.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-25  
       
Operating Basics  
Microphone Level  
Follow the steps below to change the microphone recording level.  
1. Right click on the speaker icon on the Taskbar, and select Recording  
Devices from the sub menu.  
2. Select Microphone, and click Properties.  
3. On the Levels tab move the Microphone slider to increase or decrease  
the microphone volume level.  
If you feel the microphone volume level is inadequate, move the  
Microphone Boost slider to a higher level.  
PC Beep Level  
Follow the steps below to change the PC Beep playback level.  
1. Right click on the speaker icon on the Taskbar, and select Playback  
Devices in the sub menu.  
2. Select Speakers, and click Properties.  
3. On the Levels tab move the PC Beep slider to increase or decrease the  
PC Beep volume level.  
Audio Enhancements  
In order to apply the sound effects for your current speaker, follow the steps  
below.  
1. Right click on the speaker icon on the Taskbar, and select Playback  
Devices from the sub menu.  
2. Select Speakers, and click Properties.  
3. On the Enhancements tab select the sound effects you would like, and  
click Apply.  
Realtek HD Audio Manager  
You can confirm and change the audio configuration using the Realtek HD  
Audio Manager. To launch the Realtek HD Audio Manager, click Start ->  
Control Panel, select Large icons from View by, then click Realtek HD  
Audio Manager.  
When you first launch the Realtek Audio Manager, you will see two device  
tabs. Speakers is the default output device. Microphone is the default  
input device. To change the default device, click the Set Default Device  
button under the chosen device tab.  
Information  
Click the Information button  
to view hardware information, software  
information, and language setting.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-26  
Operating Basics  
Power Management  
The audio controller in your computer can be turned off when the audio  
function is not used. To adjust the configuration of audio power  
management, click the Power Management button  
.
■ When audio power management is enabled, the circle button at the  
upper left of the Power Management is blue and convex.  
■ When audio power management is disabled, the button is black and  
concave.  
Speaker Configuration  
Click the Auto Test button  
to confirm the internal speakers or the  
headphone sound is coming from the right direction.  
Default Format  
You can change the sample rate and bit depth of sound.  
TOSHIBA Mic Effect  
TOSHIBA Mic Effect provides you with a hands-free environment for  
holding mutual communication via the Internet Protocol or Local Area  
Network. If you wish to communicate with someone on your computer, you  
can use a messenger application. However, with such an application, you  
would hear your own voice returning to you as echo during the  
communication if you did not use a headset system or headphone.  
TOSHIBA Mic Effect will reduce these echoes generated on your computer.  
To apply the echo cancellation, follow the steps below.  
1. Click the right button of a mouse on the speaker icon on the Taskbar,  
and select Playback Devices in the sub menu.  
2. On the Playback tab, select Speakers, and click Properties.  
3. On the Advanced tab, select “16 bit, 48000 Hz (DVD Quality)” in the  
pull-down menu of Default Format, and then click OK.  
4. On the Recording tab, select Microphone, and click Properties.  
5. On the Advanced tab, select “2 channel, 16 bit, 48000 Hz (DVD  
Quality)” in the pull-down menu of the Default Format pane.  
6. On the TOSHIBA Mic Effect tab, select the Enable Echo Canceller  
check box, and click Apply.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-27  
Operating Basics  
Wireless communications  
The computer’s wireless communication function supports some wireless  
communication devices.  
Only some models are equipped with both Wireless LAN and Bluetooth  
functions.  
■ Do not use the Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) or Bluetooth functionalities near a  
microwave oven or in areas subject to radio interference or magnetic  
fields. Interference from a microwave oven or other source can disrupt  
Wi-Fi or Bluetooth operation.  
■ Turn all wireless functionalities off when near a person who may have a  
cardiac pacemaker implant or other medical electric device. Radio  
waves may affect pacemaker or medical device operation, possibly  
resulting in serious injury. Follow the instruction of your medical device  
when using any wireless functionality.  
■ Always turn off wireless functionality if the computer is near automatic  
control equipment or appliances such as automatic doors or fire  
detectors. Radio waves can cause malfunction of such equipment,  
possibly resulting in serious injury.  
■ It may not be possible to make a network connection to a specified  
network name using the ad hoc network function.  
If this occurs, the new network(*) will have to be configured for all  
computers connected to the same network in order to re-enable  
network connections.  
* Please be sure to use new network name.  
Wireless LAN  
The Wireless LAN is compatible with other LAN systems based on Direct  
Sequence Spread Spectrum / Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing  
radio technology that complies with the IEEE802.11 Wireless LAN  
standard.  
Do not install or remove a memory module while Wake-up on Wireless  
LAN is enabled.  
■ The Wake-up on Wireless LAN function lets the computer's power be  
turned on when the computer receives a wake-up signal from the  
administrator's computer via a wireless network.  
■ The Wake-up on Wireless LAN function consumes power even when  
the system is off. Leave the AC adaptor connected while using this  
feature.  
■ The Wake-up on Wireless LAN function is effective only when it is  
connected with an Access Point. This function becomes invalid when  
the connection is broken.  
■ Frequency Channel Selection of 5GHz for IEEE 802.11a or/and  
IEEE802.11n draft 2.0  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-28  
     
Operating Basics  
■ Frequency Channel Selection of 2.4GHz for IEEE 802.11b/g or/and  
IEEE802.11n draft 2.0  
■ Roaming over multiple channels  
■ Card power management  
■ Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) data encryption based on an 128-bit  
encryption algorithm  
■ Wi-Fi Protected Access™ (WPA™)  
The transmission speed over the wireless LAN, and the distance over  
which the wireless LAN can reach, may vary depending on surrounding  
electromagnetic environment, obstacles, access point design and  
configuration, client design and software/hardware configurations. The  
transmission rate described is the theoretical maximum speed as specified  
under the appropriate standard - the actual transmission speed will be  
lower than the theoretical maximum speed.  
Setting  
1. Please make sure that the Wireless Communication Switch is turned  
on.  
2. Click Start -> Control Panel -> Network and Internet -> Network and  
Sharing Center.  
3. Click Set up a new connection or network.  
4. Follow the wizard. You will need the name of the wireless network  
together with security settings. Consult the documentation  
accompanied with your router or ask your wireless network  
administrator for the settings.  
Security  
■ TOSHIBA strongly recommend that you enable encryption functionality,  
otherwise your computer will be open to illegal access by an outsider  
using a wireless connection. If this occurs, the outsider may illegally  
access your system, eavesdrop, or cause the loss or destruction of  
stored data.  
■ TOSHIBA is not liable for the loss of data due to eavesdropping or  
illegal access through the wireless LAN and the damage thereof.  
Bluetooth wireless technology  
Bluetooth wireless technology eliminates the need for cables, such as  
desktop computers, between your PC and other electronic devices,  
example of printers and mobile phones.  
You cannot use the computer's built-in Bluetooth functions and an external  
Bluetooth adaptor simultaneously. For reference, Bluetooth wireless  
technology has the following features:  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-29  
 
Operating Basics  
Worldwide operation  
The Bluetooth radio transmitter and receiver operate in the 2.4GHz band,  
which is license-free and compatible with radio systems in most countries  
in the world.  
Radio links  
You can easily establish links between two or more devices, with these  
links being maintained even if the devices are not within a line-of-sight of  
each other.  
Security  
Two advanced security mechanisms ensure a high level of security:  
■ Authentication prevents access to critical data and makes it impossible  
to falsify the origin of a message.  
■ Encryption prevents eavesdropping and maintains link privacy.  
Bluetooth Stack for Windows by TOSHIBA  
Please note that this software is specifically designed for the following  
operating systems:  
■ Microsoft Windows 7  
Information regarding the use of this software with these operating systems  
is listed below, with further details being contained with the electronic help  
files supplied with the software.  
This Bluetooth Stack is based on the Bluetooth Version  
1.1/1.2/2.0+EDR/2.1+EDR specification. However, TOSHIBA cannot  
confirm the compatibility between any computing products and/or other  
electronic devices that use Bluetooth, other than TOSHIBA notebook  
computers.  
Release Notes related to the Bluetooth Stack for Windows  
by TOSHIBA  
1. Fax application software:  
Please be aware that there is some fax application software that you  
cannot use on this Bluetooth Stack.  
2. Multi-user considerations:  
On Windows 7, the use of Bluetooth is not supported in a multi-user  
environment. This means that, when you use Bluetooth, other users  
that are logged into the same computer will not be able to use this type  
of functionality.  
Product Support:  
The latest information regarding operating system support, language  
support or available upgrades can be found on our web site  
http://www.toshiba-europe.com/computers/tnt/bluetooth.htm in Europe or  
www.pcsupport.toshiba.com in the United States.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-30  
Operating Basics  
Wireless communication switch  
You can enable or disable Wireless communication functions, with the  
on/off switch. No transmissions are sent or received when the switch is off.  
Slide the switch forward to turn it off and backward to turn it on.  
Wireless communication Indicator  
The wireless communication indicator shows the status of the computer's  
wireless communication functions.  
Indicator status  
Indication  
Indicator off  
The wireless communication switch is off - no  
wireless functionality is available.  
Indicator glows  
Wireless communication switch is on. Except for  
the stopped device by the software switch, all  
the wireless-communications functions can  
output a radio wave.  
If you used the Taskbar to disable the wireless LAN, restart the computer or  
perform the following procedure to re-enable it: Start -> Control Panel  
-> System and Security -> System -> Device Manager -> Network  
adapters and right click the wireless device then choose enable.  
LAN  
The computer has built-in support for Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per  
second, 10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second,  
100BASE-TX) and Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per second,  
1000BASE-T).  
This section describes how to connect/disconnect to a LAN.  
Do not install or remove a memory module while Wake-up on LAN is  
enabled.  
■ The Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even when the system  
is off. Leave the AC adaptor connected while using this feature.  
■ The Link speed (10/100/1000 megabits per second) changes  
automatically depending on the network conditions (connected device,  
cable or noise and so on).  
LAN cable types  
The computer must be configured properly before connecting to a LAN.  
Logging onto a LAN using the computer’s default settings could cause a  
malfunction in LAN operation. Check with your LAN administrator  
regarding set-up procedures.  
User’s Manual  
4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Operating Basics  
If you are using Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per second,  
1000BASE-T), be sure to connect with a CAT5E cable or higher. You  
cannot use a CAT3 or CAT5 cable.  
If you are using Fast Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second, 100BASE-  
TX), be sure to connect with a CAT5 cable or higher. You cannot use a  
CAT3 cable.  
If you are using Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per second, 10BASE-T), you  
can connect with a CAT3 or higher cable.  
Connecting the LAN cable  
To connect the LAN cable, follow the steps as detailed below:  
■ Connect the AC adaptor before connecting the LAN cable. The AC  
adaptor must remain connected during LAN use. If you disconnect the  
AC Adaptor while the computer is accessing a LAN, the system may  
hang up.  
■ Do not connect any other cable to the LAN jack except the LAN cable.  
Otherwise, malfunctions or damage may occur.  
■ Do not connect any power supplying device to the LAN cable that is  
connected to the LAN jack. Otherwise, malfunctions or damage may  
occur.  
1. Turn off the power to the computer and to all external devices  
connected to the computer.  
2. Plug one end of the cable into the LAN jack. Press gently until you hear  
the latch click into place.  
LAN jack  
LAN cable  
Figure 4-9 Connecting the LAN cable  
3. Plug the other end of the cable into a LAN hub connector or router.  
Check with your LAN administrator and hardware or software vendor  
before using or configuring a network connection.  
When the computer is exchanging data with the LAN, the LAN Active  
indicator glows orange. When the computer is connected to a LAN hub but  
is not exchanging data, the Link indicator glows green.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-32  
 
Operating Basics  
Disconnecting the LAN cable  
To disconnect the LAN cable, follow the steps as detailed below:  
Make sure the LAN Active indicator (orange LED) is out before you  
disconnect the computer from the LAN.  
1. Pinch the lever on the connector in the computer’s LAN jack and pull  
out the connector.  
2. Disconnect the cable from the LAN hub or router in the same manner.  
Check with your LAN administrator and hardware or software vendor  
before disconnecting from the hub.  
Computer Handling  
This section explains computer handling and maintenance.  
Cleaning the computer  
To help ensure long, trouble-free operation, keep the computer free of dust  
and dirt, and use care with all liquids around it.  
■ Be careful not to spill liquids into the computer. If the computer does get  
wet, turn the power off immediately and let the computer dry completely  
- in these circumstance you should get the computer inspected by an  
authorized service provider in order to assess the scope of any  
damage.  
■ Clean the plastics of the computer using a slightly water dampened  
cloth.  
■ You can clean the display screen by spraying a small amount of glass  
cleaner onto a soft, clean cloth and then wiping the screen gently with  
the cloth.  
Never spray cleaner directly onto the computer or let liquid run into any  
part of it. Never use harsh or caustic chemical products to clean the  
computer.  
Moving the computer  
While the computer is designed for rugged durability you should exercise a  
few simple precautions when moving it in order to help ensure trouble-free  
operation.  
■ Before moving the computer, it is recommended that you change the  
setting associated with the Hard Disk Drive Protection feature. Please  
refer to the section, Using the Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Protection, in this  
chapter for further information.  
■ Make sure all disk/disc activity has ended before moving the computer -  
check that the HDD and other indicators on the front of the computer  
are off.  
■ Turn off (shut down) the computer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-33  
       
Operating Basics  
■ Disconnect the AC adaptor and all peripherals before moving the  
computer.  
■ Close the display panel.  
■ Do not pick up the computer by its display panel.  
■ Before carrying your computer, shut it down, disconnect the AC adaptor  
and allow it to cool down - a failure to follow this instruction may result in  
minor heat injury.  
■ Be careful not to subject the computer to impact or shock - a failure to  
follow this instruction could result in damage to computer, computer  
failure or loss of data.  
■ Never transport your computer with any cards installed - this may cause  
damage to either the computer and/or the card resulting in product  
failure.  
■ Always use a suitable carry case when transporting the computer.  
■ When carrying your computer, be sure to hold it securely so that it does  
not fall or hit anything.  
■ Do not carry your computer by holding any of its protruding elements.  
Using the Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Protection  
This computer has a function for reducing the risk of damage on the hard  
disk drive.  
Using an acceleration sensor built into the computer, TOSHIBA HDD  
Protection detects vibration shocks and similar signs of movement of the  
computer, and automatically moves the Hard Disk Drive head to a safe  
position to reduce the risk of damage that could be caused by head-to-disk  
contact.  
■ The TOSHIBA HDD Protection function does not guarantee that the  
hard disk drive will not be damaged.  
■ TOSHIBA HDD Protection cannot be used in models that are equipped  
with SSD.  
When vibration is detected, a message will be displayed on the screen, and  
the icon in the Taskbar notification area will change to the protection state.  
This message is displayed until the OK button is pressed or 30 seconds  
pass. When vibration subsides, the icon returns to the normal state.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-34  
     
Operating Basics  
Taskbar icon  
State  
Icon Description  
TOSHIBA HDD Protection is enabled.  
Normal  
Protection  
OFF  
TOSHIBA HDD Protection is active. The  
hard disk drive head is in a safe position.  
TOSHIBA HDD Protection is disabled.  
TOSHIBA HDD Protection Properties  
You can change the TOSHIBA HDD Protection settings by using the  
TOSHIBA HDD Protection Properties window. To open the window, click  
Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> HDD Protection  
Settings. The window can also be started from the icon on the Taskbar or  
from the Control Panel.  
HDD Protection  
You can choose whether to enable or disable TOSHIBA HDD Protection.  
Detection Level  
This function can be set to four levels. The sensitivity levels in which  
vibrations, impacts and their similar signs are detected can be set to OFF,  
1, 2 and 3 in ascending order. Level 3 is recommended for better protection  
of the computer. However, when the computer is used in a mobile  
environment or in other unstable conditions, setting the detection level to 3  
could result in frequent execution of TOSHIBA HDD Protection, which will  
slow Hard Disk Drive reading and writing. Set a lower detection level when  
the speed of Hard Disk Drive reading and writing is a priority.  
Different detection levels can be set depending on whether the computer is  
used as handheld or mobile usages, or whether it is used in a stable  
environment such as on a table in the workplace or at home. By setting  
different detection levels for the computer depending on whether it runs  
with the AC power (desktop) or with batteries (handheld or mobile usage),  
the detection level automatically switches according to the power  
connection mode.  
3D Viewer  
This feature displays a 3D object on the screen which moves in according  
to tilting or vibration of the computer.  
When the TOSHIBA HDD Protection detects computer vibration the Hard  
Disk Drive head is parked and the 3D object disk rotation will stop. When  
the head is un-parked the disk will begin to rotate again.  
The 3D Viewer can be started from the icon in the task tray.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-35  
Operating Basics  
■ This 3D object virtually represents the Computer's internal Hard Disk  
Drive. This representation may vary from the actual number of disks,  
disk rotation, head movement, part size, shape and direction.  
■ This feature may use a large amount of CPU and memory on some  
models. The computer may become slow or sluggish when attempting  
to run other applications while the 3D Viewer is displayed.  
■ Intensely shaking the computer or other subjecting it to strong impacts  
may cause damage to the computer.  
Details  
To open the Details window, click the Setup Detail button in the TOSHIBA  
HDD Protection Properties window.  
Detection Level Amplification  
When the AC adaptor is disconnected or the lid is closed, HDD Detection  
assumes that the computer will be carried and sets the detection level to  
the maximum for 10 seconds.  
HDD Protection Message  
Specify whether to display a message when TOSHIBA HDD Protection is  
active.  
This function does not work when the computer is booting, in Sleep Mode,  
in Hibernation Mode, in transition to Hibernation Mode, recovering from  
Hibernation Mode, or powered off. Do not subject the computer to vibration  
or impact while the function is disabled.  
Using the TOSHIBA USB Sleep and Charge Utility  
This utility displays whether the USB Sleep and Charge function is enabled  
or disabled and shows the positions of USB ports that support the USB  
Sleep and Charge function. It also displays the remaining battery capacity.  
USB Sleep and Charge  
Your computer can supply USB bus power (DC5V) to the USB port even  
when the power of the computer is turned OFF. "Power OFF" includes  
Sleep Mode, Hibernation Mode or shutdown state.  
This function can be used for ports that support the USB Sleep and Charge  
function (hereinafter called "compatible ports").  
Compatible ports are USB ports that have the ( ) symbol icon.  
You can use the "USB Sleep and Charge function" to charge certain USB-  
compatible external devices such as mobile phones or portable digital  
music players.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-36  
       
Operating Basics  
However, the "USB Sleep and Charge function" may not work with certain  
external devices even if they are compliant with the USB specification. In  
those cases, turn the power of the computer ON to charge the device.  
■ When "USB Sleep and Charge function" is enabled, USB bus power  
(DC5V) will be supplied to compatible ports even when the power of  
the computer is turned OFF.  
USB bus power (DC5V) is similarly supplied to the external devices  
which are connected to the compatible ports. However, some external  
devices cannot be charged solely by supplying USB bus power  
(DC5V).  
As for the specifications of the external devices, please contact the  
device manufacturer or check the specifications of the external devices  
thoroughly before use.  
■ Using the USB sleep and charge function to charge external devices  
will take longer than charging the devices with their own chargers.  
■ If USB Sleep and Charge function is enabled, the computer’s battery  
will discharge during hibernation or when the computer is turned off. It  
is recommended that you connect the AC adaptor to the computer  
when enabling the USB Sleep and Charge function.  
■ External devices connected to the USB bus power (DC5V) function that  
interfaces with the power ON/OFF of the computer may always be in  
an operational state.  
■ When there is a current overflow of the external devices connected to  
the compatible ports, USB bus power (DC5V) supply may be stopped  
for safety reasons.  
■ When "USB Sleep and Charge function" is enabled, the "USB Wakeup  
function" does not work for compatible ports.  
In that case, if there is a USB port that does not have the USB Sleep  
and Charge function-compatible icon ( ), attach the mouse or  
keyboard to it.  
If all USB ports have the USB Sleep and Charge function-compatible  
icon ( ), change to disable "USB Sleep and Charge function".  
The "USB Wakeup function" will now work, but the "USB Sleep and  
Charge function" will be disabled.  
Metal paper clips or hair pins/clips will generate heat if they come into  
contact with USB ports. Do not allow USB ports to come into contact with  
metal products, for example when carrying the computer in your bag.  
Starting the USB Sleep and Charge Utility  
To start the utility, click Start-> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities  
-> USB Sleep and Charge.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-37  
Operating Basics  
Enabling USB Sleep and Charge  
This utility can be used to enable and disable the USB Sleep and Charge  
function.  
Default setting is Disable. Select the "Group 1" check box to enable this  
function.  
Power supply mode settings  
There are several USB Sleep and Charge function modes.  
"Mode 1 (default)" should normally be used. Set one of the other modes if  
the charge function cannot be used in "Mode 1 (default)". Change the  
mode from Mode 4 to Mode1 to find the suitable mode for your USB device  
to charge.  
This function may not be able to be used with some connected external  
devices even if the appropriate mode is selected. In this situation, clear the  
check box and stop using this function.  
Battery Settings  
This utility can be used to specify the lower limit of remaining battery life for  
USB Sleep and Charge. Move the slider bar to specify the lower limit. If the  
remaining battery life falls below the setting, the USB Sleep and Charge  
function will be stopped. Selecting the "AC Only" check box sets the utility  
to only charge when the AC adaptor is connected.  
Heat dispersal  
To protect against overheating, the processor is equipped with an internal  
temperature sensor which activates a cooling fan or lowers the processing  
speed if the computer's internal temperature rises to a certain level. You are  
able to select whether to control this temperature by either turning on the  
fan first, then if necessary lowering the processor speed, or by lowering the  
processor speed first, then if necessary turning on the fan. Both of these  
functions are controlled through the Power Options.  
When the processor's temperature falls within normal range, the fan will be  
turned off and the processor operation returned to its standard speed.  
If the processor's temperature reaches an unacceptably high level with  
either setting, the computer automatically shuts down to prevent any  
damage. In this instance all unsaved data in memory will be lost.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-38  
   
Chapter 5  
The Keyboard  
The computer's keyboard layouts are compatible with a 104/105-key  
enhanced keyboard - by pressing some keys in combination, all of the  
104/105-key enhanced keyboard functions can be performed on the  
computer.  
The number of keys available on your keyboard will depend on which  
country/region your computer is configured for, with keyboards being  
available for numerous languages.  
In use there are six different types of keys, specifically typewriter keys,  
function keys, soft keys, Hot keys, Windows special keys and the keypad  
overlay.  
Typewriter keys  
The typewriter keys produce the upper-case and lower-case letters,  
numbers, punctuation marks, and special symbols that appear on the  
screen. However, there are some differences between using a typewriter  
and using a computer keyboard:  
■ Letters and numbers produced in computer text vary in width. Spaces,  
which are created by a 'space character' may also vary depending on  
line justification and other factors.  
■ The lowercase l (el) and the number 1 (one), together with the  
uppercase O (oh) and the 0 (zero), are not interchangeable on  
computers as they are on a typewriter.  
■ The CAPS LOCK function key locks only the alphabetic characters into  
upper-case while the Shift Lock function on a typewriter places all keys  
in the shifted position.  
■ The SHIFT keys, the Tab key, and the BACK SPACE key perform the  
same function as their typewriter counterparts but also have special  
computer functions.  
Never remove the key caps on your keyboard. Doing so could cause  
damage to the parts under the key caps.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-1  
           
The Keyboard  
Function keys: F1 … F12  
The function keys (not to be confused with the special FN key) are the  
twelve keys at the top of your keyboard - these keys function differently  
from other keys.  
F1 through F12 are called function keys because they execute  
programmed functions when pressed and, when used in combination with  
the FN key, those keys marked with icons also execute specific functions  
on the computer. Please refer to the section, Soft keys: FN key  
combinations, in this chapter for further information, taking care to note that  
the function executed by individual keys will depend on the software you  
are using.  
Soft keys: FN key combinations  
The FN (function) is unique to TOSHIBA computers and is used in  
combination with other keys to form soft keys. Soft keys are key  
combinations that enable, disable or configure specific features.  
Please note that some software may disable or interfere with soft-key  
operations, and that the soft-key settings are not restored when the  
computer returns from Sleep Mode.  
Emulating keys on an enhanced keyboard  
Figure 5-1 A 104-key enhanced keyboard layout  
This computer's keyboard is designed to provide all the features of the 104-  
key enhanced keyboard.  
Since the keyboard is smaller and has fewer keys, some of the enhanced  
keyboard functions must be simulated using two keys instead of one on the  
larger keyboard.  
The FN key can be combined with the following keys to simulate functions  
similar to those of keys on the 104/105 key enhanced keyboard which are  
not on this computer's keyboard.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-2  
           
The Keyboard  
Press FN + F10 or FN + F11 to access the computer's integrated keypad.  
When activated, the keys with grey markings on their bottom edge become  
either numeric keypad keys (FN + F11) or cursor control keys (FN + F10).  
Please refer to the Keypad overlay section in this chapter for more  
information on how to operate these keys, taking care to note that the  
power on default for both settings is off.  
Press FN + F12 (ScrLock) to lock the cursor on a specific line. The power  
on default is off.  
Press FN + ENTER to simulate ENTER on the enhanced keyboard’s  
numeric keypad.  
Hot keys  
Hot keys (pressing FN + a function or ESC key) let you enable or disable  
certain features of the computer.  
Mute: Pressing FN + ESC turns the volume on and off.  
Lock: Pressing FN + F1 enters ''Lock computer mode''. To restore your  
desktop, you need to log on again.  
Power Plan: Pressing FN + F2 changes the power settings.  
User’s Manual  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
The Keyboard  
Sleep: Pressing FN + F3 switches the system to Sleep Mode.  
Hibernate: Pressing FN + F4 switches the system to Hibernation Mode.  
Output: Pressing FN + F5 changes the active display device.  
To use a simultaneous mode, you must set the resolution of the internal  
display panel to match the resolution of the external display device.  
Brightness Down: Pressing FN + F6 decreases the computer's display  
panel brightness in individual steps.  
Brightness Up: Pressing FN + F7 increases the computer's display panel  
brightness in individual steps.  
Wireless: Pressing FN + F8 switches the active wireless devices if the  
wireless communication switch is switched on.  
If no wireless communication device is installed, no dialog box will appear.  
Touch Pad: Pressing FN + F9 enables or disables the Touch Pad function.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-4  
                               
The Keyboard  
Zoom: Pressing FN + Space changes the display resolution.  
ODD: Pressing FN + Tab turns the power of the optical disc drive on/off or  
ejects the disc tray.  
TOSHIBA Zooming Utility (reduce): Pressing FN + 1 reduces the icon  
size on the desktop or the font sizes within one of the supported application  
windows.  
TOSHIBA Zooming Utility (enlarge): Pressing FN + 2 enlarges the icon  
size on the desktop or the font sizes within one of the supported application  
windows.  
FN Sticky key  
You can use the TOSHIBA Accessibility Utility to make the FN key sticky,  
that is, you can press it once, release it, and then press an "F Number"  
key. To start the TOSHIBA Accessibility utility, click Start -> All Programs -  
> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> Accessibility.  
Windows special keys  
The keyboard provides two keys that have special functions in Windows,  
the Windows Start Button key activates the Start menu while the  
application key has the same function as the secondary (right) mouse  
button.  
This key activates the Windows Start menu.  
This key has the same function as the secondary (right) mouse button.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-5  
                     
The Keyboard  
Keypad overlay  
Your computer's keyboard does not have a separate numeric keypad but  
includes a numeric keypad overlay which functions like one - this is located  
in the center of the keyboard with the relevant keys having grey letters at  
their front edge. The overlay provides the same functions as the numeric  
keypad on a standard 104/105-key enhanced keyboard.  
Turning on the overlays  
The numeric keypad overlay can be used for numeric data input or cursor  
and page control.  
Arrow Mode  
To turn on Arrow Mode, press FN + F10 - the Arrow Mode indicator lights  
and you are able to access cursor and page control functions by using the  
keys. You are able to press FN + F10 again to turn off this overlay function.  
Numeric Mode  
To turn on Numeric Mode, press FN + F11 - the Numeric Mode indicator  
lights and you are able to access numeric characters by using the keys.  
You are able to press FN + F11 again to turn off this overlay function.  
Figure 5-2 The numeric keypad overlay  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-6  
         
The Keyboard  
Temporarily using normal keyboard (overlay on)  
While using the overlay, you can temporarily access the normal keyboard  
functions without having to turn the overlay off:  
1. Hold down FN key and press any other key - this key will operate as if  
the overlay were off.  
2. Type upper-case characters by holding down FN + SHIFT and pressing  
a character key.  
3. Release FN key to continue using the selected overlay function.  
Temporarily using overlay (overlay off)  
While using the normal keyboard function, you can temporarily use the  
keypad overlay without having to turn it on:  
1. Hold down FN key.  
2. Check the keyboard indicators as pressing the FN key will turn on the  
most recently used overlay function - if the Numeric Mode indicator  
lights you can use the overlay for numeric entry, while if the Arrow Mode  
indicator lights, you can use the overlay for cursor and page control  
function.  
3. Release FN key to return to normal keyboard operation.  
Temporarily changing modes  
If the computer is in Numeric Mode, you can switch temporarily to Arrow  
Mode by pressing a SHIFT key, while if it is in Arrow Mode, you can switch  
temporarily to Numeric Mode by also pressing a SHIFT key.  
Generating ASCII characters  
Not all ASCII characters can be generated using normal keyboard  
operation, but you are able to generate these characters using their specific  
ASCII codes.  
With the overlay on:  
1. Hold down ALT key.  
2. Using the overlay keys, type the ASCII code of the character you  
require.  
3. Release ALT - the ASCII character will appear on the display screen.  
With the overlay off:  
1. Hold down ALT + FN.  
2. Using the overlay keys, type the ASCII code of the character you  
require.  
3. Release ALT + FN - the ASCII character will appear on the display  
screen.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-7  
       
Chapter 6  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
The computer's power resources include the AC adaptor, battery pack and  
any internal batteries. This chapter provides details on making the most  
effective use of these resources, and includes information on charging and  
changing batteries, tips for saving battery power, and information on the  
different power-up modes.  
Power conditions  
The computer's operating capability and battery charge status are affected  
by different power conditions, including whether an AC adaptor is  
connected, whether a battery pack is installed and what the charge level is  
for that battery.  
Table 6-1 Power conditions  
Power on  
Power off  
(no operation)  
AC  
adaptor  
connected  
Main Battery  
fully charged  
• Operates  
• No charge  
• No charge  
• LED: Battery green  
DC IN green  
• LED: Battery green  
DC IN green  
1
Main Battery  
partially  
charged or no  
• Operates  
• Quick charge*  
1
• Charge*  
• LED: Battery orange  
• LED: Battery orange  
DC IN green  
charge  
DC IN green  
No Main battery • Operates  
• No charge  
installed  
• No charge  
• LED: Battery off  
DC IN green  
• LED: Battery off  
DC IN green  
User’s Manual  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Power and Power-Up Modes  
Table 6-1 Power conditions continued  
Power on  
Power off  
(no operation)  
AC  
adaptor  
connected  
2nd battery fully • Operates  
• No charge  
charged  
• No charge  
• LED: 2nd battery green  
DC IN green  
• LED: 2nd battery green  
DC IN green  
2
2nd battery  
partially  
charged or no  
charge  
• Operates  
• Quick charge*  
2
• Charge*  
• LED: 2nd battery orange  
• LED: 2nd battery orange  
DC IN green  
DC IN green  
No 2nd battery  
installed  
• Operates  
• No charge  
• No charge  
• LED: 2nd battery off  
DC IN green  
• LED: 2nd battery off  
DC IN green  
AC  
adaptor  
not  
Main battery  
charge is above  
low battery  
• Operates  
• LED: Battery off  
DC IN off  
connected trigger point  
Main battery  
charge is below  
low battery  
• Operates  
• LED: Battery  
flashes orange  
trigger point  
DC IN off  
3
Main battery  
charge is  
Computer shuts down *  
exhausted  
4
• LED: Battery off  
DC IN off  
No main battery • No operation *  
installed  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-2  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
Table 6-1 Power conditions continued  
Power on  
Power off  
(no operation)  
AC  
adaptor  
not  
2nd battery  
charge is above  
low battery  
• Operates  
• LED: 2nd battery off  
DC IN off  
connected trigger point  
2nd battery  
• Operates  
charge is below  
low battery  
trigger point  
• LED: 2nd battery  
flashes orange  
DC IN off  
3
2nd battery  
charge is  
Computer shuts down *  
exhausted  
5
No 2nd battery  
is installed  
• No operation *  
• LED: 2nd battery off  
DC IN off  
1
* When the Slice Expansion Battery is not charging.  
2
* When the main battery is not charging.  
3
* For the computer to shut down in Hibernation Mode, the Hibernation  
feature must be enabled in Power Options. If a main battery and a Slice  
Expansion Battery are installed, the computer does not shut down until  
the charge in both batteries is exhausted.  
4
* When no Slice Expansion Battery is installed.  
5
* When no main battery is installed.  
When batteries are charged, the main battery is charged first. When it is  
fully charged, the Slice Expansion Battery is charged.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-3  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
Monitoring of power condition  
As shown in the below table, the Battery, 2nd battery, DC IN and Power  
indicators on the system indicator alert you to the computer’s operating  
capability and battery charge status.  
Battery indicator  
Check the Battery indicator to determine the status of the main battery and  
the 2nd battery indicator to determine the status of the Slice Expansion  
Battery. The following indicator lights indicate the battery status:  
Flashing orange  
The battery charge is low, the AC adaptor must be  
connected in order to recharge the battery.  
Orange  
Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and the  
battery is charging.  
Green  
Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and the  
battery is fully charged.  
No light  
Under any other conditions, the indicator does not  
light.  
If the battery pack becomes too hot while it is being charged, the charge  
will stop and the Battery indicator will go out. When the battery pack's  
temperature falls to a normal range, charging will resume - this process will  
occur regardless of whether the computer's power is on or off.  
DC IN indicator  
Check the DC IN indicator to determine the power status with the AC  
adaptor connected - the following indicator conditions should be noted:  
Green  
Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and is  
correctly supplying power to the computer.  
Flashing orange  
Indicates a problem with the power supply. You  
should initially try plugging the AC adaptor into  
another power outlet - if it still does not operate  
properly, you should contact your reseller or dealer.  
No light  
Under any other conditions, the indicator does not  
light.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-4  
       
Power and Power-Up Modes  
Power indicator  
Check the Power indicator to determine the power status of the computer -  
the following indicator conditions should be noted:  
Green  
Indicates power is being supplied to the computer  
and the computer is turned on.  
Blinking orange  
Indicates that the computer is in Sleep Mode and  
that there is sufficient power available (AC adaptor  
or battery) to maintain this condition. In Sleep  
Mode, this indicator will turn on for one second and  
off for two seconds.  
No light  
Under any other conditions, the indicator does not  
light.  
Battery  
This section explains battery types, use, recharging methods and handling.  
Battery types  
The computer has three different types of batteries.  
Battery pack  
When the AC adaptor is not connected, the computer's main power source  
is a removable lithium ion battery pack, also referred to in this manual as  
the main battery. You can purchase additional battery packs for extended  
use of the computer away from an AC power source although you should  
not change the battery pack while the AC adaptor is connected.  
Before you remove the battery pack, save your data and shut down the  
computer, or place the computer into Hibernation Mode. Please be aware  
that, when placing the computer into Hibernation Mode, the contents of  
memory will be saved to the hard disk drive, although for safety sake, it is  
best to also save your data manually.  
Slice Expansion Battery  
The Slice Expansion Battery can be purchased separately as an optional  
accessory.  
For detailed information on this battery, refer to Connecting and  
disconnecting the Slice Expansion Battery.  
User’s Manual  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Power and Power-Up Modes  
Real Time Clock (RTC) battery  
The Real Time Clock (RTC) battery provides power for the internal real time  
clock and calendar function and also maintains the system configuration  
while the computer is turned off. If the RTC battery becomes completely  
discharged, the system will lose this information and the real time clock and  
calendar will stop working - in this instance the following message will be  
displayed when you turn on the power:  
S
**** RTC battery is low or CMOS checksum is  
inconsistent ****  
Press [F1] key to set Date/Time.  
You can change the Real Time Clock settings by turning the computer on  
while pressing the ESC key and then the F1 key when prompted. Please  
refer to Chapter 8 Troubleshooting for further information.  
The RTC battery does not charge while the computer is turned off even if  
the AC adaptor is attached.  
Care and use of the battery pack  
This section provides the important safety precautions in order to handle  
your battery pack properly.  
Refer to the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort for  
detailed precautions and handling instructions.  
■ Make sure the battery is securely installed in the computer before  
attempting to charge the battery pack. Improper installation could  
generate smoke or fire, or cause the battery pack to rupture.  
■ Keep the battery pack out of reach of infants and children. It can cause  
injury.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-6  
 
Power and Power-Up Modes  
■ The battery pack and Slice Expansion Battery are lithium ion batteries,  
which can explode if not replaced, used, handled or disposed of  
properly. Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or  
regulations. Use only batteries recommended by TOSHIBA as  
replacements.  
■ The computer's RTC battery is a Ni-MH battery and should be replaced  
only by your dealer or by a TOSHIBA service representative. The  
battery can explode if not properly replaced, used, handled or  
disposed. Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or  
regulations.  
■ Charge the battery pack only in an ambient temperature between 5 and  
35 degrees Celsius. Otherwise, the electrolyte solution might leak,  
battery pack performance might deteriorate and the battery life might  
be shortened.  
■ Never install or remove the battery pack without first turning off the  
power and disconnecting the AC adaptor. Never remove the battery  
pack while the computer is in Sleep Mode. Data could be lost.  
■ When the High Capacity Battery Pack is connected to the computer, do  
not hold on only to the High Capacity Battery Pack when lifting the  
computer up. The High Capacity Battery Pack may separate from the  
computer, causing it to fall and cause injuries.  
■ Never remove the battery pack while the Wake-up on LAN function is  
enabled. Data will be lost. Before you remove a battery pack, disable  
the Wake-up on LAN function.  
■ Never remove the battery pack while the Wake-up on Wireless LAN  
function is enabled. Data will be lost. Before you remove a battery  
pack, disable the Wake-up on Wireless LAN function.  
Charging the batteries  
When the power in the battery pack becomes low, the Battery indicator will  
flash orange to indicate that only a few minutes of battery power remain. If  
you continue to use the computer while the Battery indicator flashes, the  
computer will enable Hibernation Mode so that you do not lose any data,  
and automatically turn itself off.  
You must recharge a battery pack when it becomes discharged.  
Procedures  
To recharge a battery pack while it is installed in the computer, connect the  
AC adaptor to the DC IN 15V jack and plug the other end into a working  
outlet - the Battery indicator will glow orange while the battery is being  
charged.  
Use only the computer connected to an AC power source or optional  
TOSHIBA Battery charger to charge the battery pack. Never attempt to  
charge the battery pack with any other charger.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-7  
 
Power and Power-Up Modes  
Time  
Refer to User Information Guide about Charging time.  
Battery charging notice  
The battery may not begin charging immediately under the following  
conditions:  
■ The battery is extremely hot or cold (if the battery is extremely hot, it  
might not charge at all). To ensure the battery charges to its full  
capacity, you should charge it at room temperature of between 5° to  
35°C (41° to 95°F).  
■ The battery is nearly completely discharged. In this instance you should  
leave the AC adaptor connected for a few minutes and the battery  
should begin charging.  
The Battery indicator may show a rapid decrease in battery operating time  
when you try to charge a battery under the following conditions:  
■ The battery has not been used for a long time.  
■ The battery has completely discharged and been left in the computer for  
a long time.  
■ A cool battery is installed in a warm computer.  
In such cases you should follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Fully discharge the battery by leaving it in the computer with the power  
on until the system automatically turns itself off.  
2. Connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN 15V jack of the computer, and to  
a wall outlet that is supplying power.  
3. Charge the battery until the Battery indicator glows green.  
Repeat these steps two or three times until the battery recovers normal  
capacity.  
Monitoring battery capacity  
Remaining battery power can be monitored using the following methods.  
■ Clicking the battery icon on the Taskbar  
■ Via the Battery Status in the Windows Mobility Center window  
■ You should wait at least 16 seconds after turning on the computer  
before trying to monitor the remaining operating time. This is because  
the computer needs this time to check the battery's remaining capacity  
and then calculate the remaining operating time, based on this together  
with the current power consumption.  
■ Please be aware that the actual remaining operating time may differ  
slightly from the calculated time.  
■ With repeated discharges and recharges, the battery's capacity will  
gradually decrease. In view of this it will be noted that an often used,  
older battery will not operate for as long as a new battery even when  
both are fully charged.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-8  
 
Power and Power-Up Modes  
Maximizing battery operating time  
A battery's usefulness depends on how long it can supply power on a  
single charge, while how long the charge lasts in a battery depends on:  
■ Processor speed  
■ Screen brightness  
■ System Sleep Mode  
■ System Hibernation Mode  
■ Display power off period  
■ Hard disk drive power off period  
■ How often and for how long you use the hard disk drive and external  
disk(c) drives, for example, optical disc and floppy diskette drive.  
■ How much charge the battery contained to begin with.  
■ How you use optional devices, such as ExpressCards, to which the  
battery supplies power.  
■ Whether you enable Sleep Mode, which can conserve battery power if  
you are frequently turning the computer off and on.  
■ Where you store your programs and data.  
■ Whether you close the display panel when you are not using the  
keyboard - closing the display saves power.  
■ The environmental temperature - operating time decreases at low  
temperatures.  
■ The condition of the battery terminals - you should always ensure the  
terminals stay clean by wiping them with a clean dry cloth before  
installing the battery pack.  
Retaining data with power off  
Refer to User Information Guide about Retaining time.  
Extending battery life  
To maximize the life of your battery packs:  
■ At least once a month, disconnect the computer from a power source  
and operate it on battery power until the battery pack fully discharges.  
Before doing so, follow the steps as detailed below.  
1. Turn off the computer's power.  
2. Disconnect the AC adaptor and turn on the computer's power - if it  
does not turn on then go to Step 4.  
3. Operate the computer on battery power for five minutes. If you find  
that the battery pack has at least five minutes of operating time,  
continue operating until the battery pack is fully discharged,  
however, if the Battery indicator flashes or there is some other  
warning to indicate a low battery condition, go to Step 4.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-9  
   
Power and Power-Up Modes  
4. Connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN 15V jack of the computer, and  
to a wall outlet that is supplying power. The DC IN indicator should  
glow green, and the Battery indicator should glow orange to  
indicate that the battery pack is being charged, however, in the  
event that DC IN indicator does not glow this indicates that power is  
not being supplied - check the connections for the AC adaptor and  
the power cord.  
5. Charge the battery pack until the Battery indicator glows green.  
■ If you have extra battery packs, rotate their use.  
■ If you will not be using the system for an extended period, for example  
for more than one month, remove the battery pack from the computer.  
■ Store spare battery packs in a cool dry place out of direct sunlight.  
Replacing the battery pack  
Please be aware that the battery pack is classified as a consumable item.  
The operating life of the battery pack will gradually reduce through  
repeated charging and discharging, and will need to be replaced when it  
reaches the end of its operating life. In addition to this, you might also  
replace a discharged battery pack with a charged spare when you are  
operating your computer away from an AC power source for an extended  
period of time.  
This section explains how to remove and install the battery pack, and  
begins with the removal process which is detailed through the following  
steps.  
■ Do not remove the battery pack while the computer is in Sleep Mode.  
Data is stored in RAM, so if the computer loses power it could be lost.  
■ In Hibernation Mode, data will be lost if you remove the battery pack or  
disconnect the AC adaptor before the save is completed. Wait for the  
Hard Disk Drive indicator to go out.  
■ Do not touch the battery release latch while holding the computer or the  
battery pack might fall out due to the unintentional release of the  
battery release latch and cause injuries.  
Removing the battery pack  
To remove a discharged battery, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Save your work.  
2. Turn the computer's power off - ensure that the Power indicator is off.  
3. Remove all cables and peripherals that are connected to the computer.  
4. Close the display panel and turn the computer upside down.  
5. Slide the battery lock (1) into its (  
) position.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-10  
   
Power and Power-Up Modes  
6. Slide and hold the battery release latch (2) to disengage the battery  
pack and then remove it from the computer (3).  
Battery release latch  
Battery pack  
Battery lock  
Figure 6-1 Releasing the battery pack  
Installing the battery pack  
To install a battery pack, follow the steps as detailed below:  
Do not touch the battery release latch while holding the computer or the  
battery pack might fall out due to the unintentional release of the battery  
release latch and cause injuries.  
1. Insert the battery pack as far as it will go into the computer (1).  
2. Ensure that the battery pack is securely in place and the battery lock (2)  
is in its (  
) position.  
Battery pack  
Battery lock  
Figure 6-2 Securing the battery pack  
3. Turn your computer over.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-11  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
Connecting and disconnecting the Slice Expansion Battery  
This battery pack increases your computer's operating time when a main  
battery pack is also installed.  
This section explains how to connect and disconnect the Slice Expansion  
Battery, and begins with the removal process which is detailed through the  
following steps.  
Connecting the Slice Expansion Battery  
To connect the Slice Expansion Battery to the computer, follow the steps as  
detailed below:  
When handling Slice Expansion Battery, be careful not to short circuit the  
terminals. Also do not drop, hit or otherwise apply impact; do not scratch or  
break the casing and do not twist or bend the latches of it.  
1. Be sure the computer’s power is off and all cables are disconnected.  
2. Close the display panel and turn the computer upside down.  
3. Remove the protective cap from the Slice Expansion Battery.  
4. Open latches on the Slice Expansion Battery and fit a tab on the battery  
into the hole on the underside of the computer.  
5. Connect the Slice Expansion Battery's connector to the docking port.  
Latches  
Tab  
Hole  
Docking port  
Figure 6-3 Seating the Slice Expansion Battery  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-12  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
6. Close the latches to secure the Slice Expansion Battery to the  
computer.  
Latches  
Figure 6-4 Securing the latches  
Disconnecting the Slice Expansion Battery  
To disconnect the Slice Expansion Battery from the computer, follow the  
steps as detailed below:  
1. Save your work.  
2. Turn the computer’s power off. Make sure the Power indicator is off.  
3. Remove all cables connected to the computer.  
4. Close the display panel and turn the computer upside down.  
5. Open the release latches in the direction of the arrows.  
Latches  
Figure 6-5 Releasing the latches  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-13  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
6. Lift off the Slice Expansion Battery.  
Figure 6-6 Removing the Slice Expansion Battery  
7. Be sure to replace the protective cap before storing the Slice Expansion  
Battery.  
TOSHIBA Password Utility  
The TOSHIBA Password Utility provides two levels of password security:  
User and Supervisor.  
Passwords set by the TOSHIBA Password Utility function are different  
from the Windows password.  
User Password  
To start the utility, point to or click the following items:  
Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities ->Password Utility  
The User Password dialog box contains two main fields: User Password  
and User Token.  
User authentication may be required to validate user rights when using  
"TOSHIBA Password Utility" to delete or change passwords, or create  
tokens, etc.  
User Password field  
■ Set (button)  
Click this button to register a password of up to 50 characters. After a  
password is set, you will be prompted to enter it when you start the  
computer. Check "Set the same string simultaneously as the HDD User  
Password" when setting the HDD User Password.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-14  
     
Power and Power-Up Modes  
■ After you set the password, a dialog box will be displayed asking  
whether you want to save it to a floppy diskette or other media. If you  
forget the password, you can open the password file on another  
computer. Be sure to keep the media in a safe place.  
■ When entering the character string to register the password, enter from  
the keyboard character by character and do not enter as ASCII code or  
copy-and-paste the character string. In addition, ensure that the  
registered password is correct by outputting the character string to the  
password file.  
■ When entering a password, do not enter any characters (for example  
"!" or "#") produced by pressing the SHIFT or ALT keys and so on.  
■ Delete (button)  
Click this button to delete a registered password. Before you can delete  
a password, you must first enter the current password correctly or insert  
a proper token. Please use BIOS Setup to change or delete the HDD  
Passwords or to set the HDD Master Password.  
■ To start BIOS Setup;  
1. Turn on the computer while pressing the ESC key.  
2. Press the F1 key when directed.  
■ To end the BIOS Setup;  
1. Press End and then press the Y key to accept the changes.  
The computer will restart.  
■ Change (button)  
Click this button to change a registered password. Before you can  
change a password, you must first enter the current password correctly  
or insert a proper token. Please use BIOS Setup to change or delete  
the HDD Passwords or to set the HDD Master Password.  
■ Owner String (text box)  
You can use this box to associate text with the password. After you  
enter text, click Apply or OK. When the computer is started, this text  
will be displayed together with the prompt asking you to enter a  
password.  
■ If you forget your HDD User Password, TOSHIBA will NOT be able to  
assist you, and your HDD will be rendered COMPLETELY and  
PERMANENTLY INOPERABLE. TOSHIBA will NOT be held  
responsible for any loss of any data, any loss of use or access to your  
HDD, or for any other losses to you or any other person or organization  
that result from the loss of access to your HDD. If you can’t accept this  
risk, don’t register the HDD User Password.  
■ When saving the HDD User Password shut down or restart the  
computer. If the computer is not shut down or restarted, the saved data  
may not be correctly reflected. For more information on shutting down  
or restarting the computer, refer to Turning on the power in Chapter 1.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-15  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
User Token field  
■ Create (button)  
You can use an SD Card token, instead of entering the password. After  
you have registered a password, insert an SD Card in SD Card slot and  
click Create. You can use an SD Card of any capacity, but it must be  
formatted correctly.  
If an unformatted card or one with an incompatible format is inserted,  
you will be prompted to format it with a tool named TOSHIBA SD  
Memory Card Format. To start the format tool, point to or click the  
following items:  
Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> SD Memory  
Card Format  
When you format an SD memory card, all data will be deleted. Be sure to  
save data on the card to other media before you format the card.  
■ Disable (button)  
Click this button to invalidate the token. You cannot re-validate old  
tokens, but you can use the same SD Cards to create new tokens.  
After using the token created for authentication, do not leave it inserted in  
the SD Card slot, ensure that the token is removed from the slot and stored  
in a safe location. If the token is left in the slot, there is a danger of theft or  
a third party using it for authentication and operating the user's computer  
(resulting in extraction, modification or deletion of data) when the user is  
not at their desk.  
Supervisor Password  
If you set a Supervisor Password, some functions might be restricted when  
a user logs on with the User Password. To set a Supervisor Password,  
execute the file TOSPU.EXE. The file is located at:  
C:\Program Files\Toshiba\PasswordUtility\TOSPU.exe, or  
C:\Program Files (x86)\Toshiba\PasswordUtility\TOSPU.exe (For  
64bit OS)  
This utility lets you do the following:  
■ Register, delete or change the Supervisor Password.  
■ Create or invalidate a Supervisor Password token.  
This function in the TOSHIBA Password Utility lets you invalidate only  
supervisor tokens or all tokens, including user and supervisor tokens.  
■ Specify restrictions for general users.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-16  
 
Power and Power-Up Modes  
Starting the computer by password  
If you have already registered a password, there are three ways to start the  
computer:  
■ Insert an SD Card token before you turn on the computer. The  
computer will start normally, without displaying a password prompt.  
■ Swipe your fingerprint on the sensor if you have already registered the  
fingerprint with the Fingerprint utility and enabled Fingerprint System  
Boot Authentication. If you would not like to swipe your finger or cannot  
authenticate the fingerprint for some reasons, push the BACK SPACE  
key to skip the fingerprint authentication screen. You can try to swipe  
the fingerprint up to five times. If you failed fingerprint authentication  
five times, you must enter the password manually to start the computer.  
■ Enter the password manually.  
The password is necessary only if the computer was turned off in Shut  
Down Mode or Hibernation Mode.  
It is not needed in Sleep Mode and Restart.  
To enter a password manually, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Turn on the power as described in Chapter 1, Getting Started. The  
following message will appear in the screen:  
S
2. Enter the Password.  
Password=  
3. Press ENTER.  
If you enter the password incorrectly three times in a row, the computer  
shuts off. In this case, you must turn the computer back on to retry  
password entry.  
Power-up modes  
The computer has three different power-up modes as follows:  
■ Shut Down Mode: The computer will shut down without saving data - in  
view of this you must always save your work before you turn the  
computer off.  
■ Hibernation Mode: Data in memory will be saved to the hard disk drive.  
■ Sleep Mode: Data will be maintained in the computer's memory.  
Please refer to the sections Turning on the power and Turning off the  
power in Chapter 1, Getting Started for further information.  
Windows utilities  
You can configure various settings associated with both Sleep Mode and  
Hibernation Mode within the Power Options (to access it, Start -> Control  
Panel -> System and Security -> Power Options).  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-17  
   
Power and Power-Up Modes  
Hot keys  
You can use the FN + F3 hot key to enter Sleep Mode or FN + F4 to enter  
Hibernation Mode - please refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard for further  
details.  
Panel power on/off  
You can set up your computer so that power is turned off automatically  
when you close the display panel, and turned on again when you open it.  
Please note that this function is only available for Sleep Mode or  
Hibernation Mode, not for Shut Down Mode.  
If the panel power off function is enabled, and you manually shut down  
Windows, do not close the display panel until the shut down process has  
been completed.  
System automatic Sleep/Hibernation  
This feature automatically turns off the system in Sleep or Hibernation  
Mode if the computer is not used for a set duration. Refer to Special  
features, in Chapter 3 for an explanation of how to set the duration.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-18  
       
Chapter 7  
HW Setup  
This chapter explains how to use the TOSHIBA HW Setup program to  
configure your computer, and provides information on settings for various  
functions.  
Accessing HW Setup  
To run the HW Setup program, click Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA  
-> Utilities -> HWSetup.  
HW Setup window  
The HW Setup window contains a number of tabs (General, Display, Boot  
Priority, Keyboard, CPU, LAN, Device Config and USB) to allow specific  
functions of the computer to be configured.  
In addition there are also three buttons: OK, Cancel and Apply.  
OK  
Accepts your changes and closes the HW Setup  
window.  
Cancel  
Apply  
Closes the window without accepting your  
changes.  
Accepts all your changes without closing the HW  
Setup window.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-1  
             
HW Setup  
General  
This window displays the BIOS version and contains two buttons : Default  
and About.  
Default  
Return all HW Setup values to the factory  
settings.  
About  
Display the HW Setup version.  
Setup  
This field displays the installed BIOS versionand date.  
Display  
This tab lets you customize your computer’s display settings for either the  
internal display or an external monitor.  
Power On Display  
This tab allows you to select the display to be used when the computer is  
started. Please note that this setting is only available on standard VGA  
mode and is not available as part of the Windows Desktop properties.  
The Power On Display is supported with some models.  
Auto-Selected  
Selects an external monitor if one is connected,  
otherwise, it selects the internal display (default).  
LCD + Analog RGB Selects both the internal display and an external  
monitor for simultaneous display.  
If the connected external monitor does not support the computer's current  
video mode, selecting the LCD + Analog RGB mode will not display any  
image on the external monitor.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-2  
   
HW Setup  
Boot Priority  
Boot Priority Options  
This tab allows you to select the priority for booting the computer - the  
following settings are available:  
FDD −> HDD −> CD-  
ROM −> LAN  
The computer looks for bootable files on devices  
in the following order: 1. floppy diskette drive*1, 2.  
hard disk drive, 3. CD-ROM*2, 4. LAN.  
HDD −> FDD −> CD-  
ROM −> LAN  
The computer looks for bootable files on devices  
in the following order: 1. hard disk drive, 2. floppy  
diskette drive*1, 3. CD-ROM*2, 4. LAN.  
FDD −> CD-ROM −>  
LAN −> HDD  
The computer looks for bootable files on devices  
in the following order: 1. floppy diskette drive*1, 2.  
CD-ROM*2, 3. LAN, 4. hard disk drive.  
HDD −> CD-ROM −>  
LAN −> FDD  
The computer looks for bootable files on devices  
in the following order: 1. hard disk drive, 2. CD-  
ROM*2, 3. LAN, 4. floppy diskette drive*1.  
CD-ROM −> LAN −>  
FDD −> HDD  
The computer looks for bootable files on devices  
in the following order: 1. CD-ROM*2, 2. LAN, 3.  
floppy diskette drive*1, 4. hard disk drive.  
CD-ROM −> LAN −>  
HDD −> FDD  
The computer looks for bootable files on devices  
in the following order: 1. CD-ROM*2, 2. LAN, 3.  
hard disk drive, 4. floppy diskette drive*1.  
You can override the settings and manually select a boot device by  
pressing one of the following keys while the computer is booting:  
U
N
1
Selects the USB floppy diskette drive*1.  
Selects the network.  
Selects the built-in hard disk drive.  
2
C
M
E
Selects the CD-ROM* .  
Selects the USB memory drive.  
Selects the eSATA HDD.  
1
* The floppy diskette drive will be used to start the computer when there is  
a bootable disk contained in the external drive. If SD memory card is  
installed as well, the external floppy diskette drive will be checked first,  
followed by the SD memory device itself.  
2
* The optical disc drive will be used to start the computer when there is a  
bootable disk contained in the drive.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-3  
     
HW Setup  
To change the boot drive, follow the steps below.  
1. Hold down F12 and boot the computer.  
2. The following menu will be displayed with the following icons: Built-in  
hard disk drive, eSATA hard disk drive, CD-ROM, FDD (or SD memory  
card), Network (LAN), USB Memory boot.  
Please note that a highlighted bar will only appear under the selected  
device.  
3. Use the left/right cursor keys to highlight the boot device you want and  
press ENTER.  
If a Supervisor Password has been set, manual boot device selection  
functions may be restricted.  
The boot device selection methods described above will not change the  
boot priority settings that have been configured in HW Setup. In addition, if  
you press a key other than one of those listed, or if the selected device is  
not installed, the system will continue to boot according to the current and  
available settings in HW Setup.  
HDD Priority Options  
If more than one hard disk drive is installed in the computer, this option  
allows you to set the priority associated with hard disk drive detection - the  
first hard disk drive detected that has a valid boot command on it will be the  
device from which the computer will start.  
Built-in HDD ->  
USB -> eSATA  
This option sets the priority as the built-in hard  
disk drive -> USB -> eSATA (Default).  
USB -> Built-in  
HDD -> eSATA  
This option sets the priority as the USB -> built-in  
hard disk drive -> eSATA.  
Built-in HDD ->  
eSATA -> USB  
This option sets the priority as the built-in hard  
disk drive -> eSATA -> USB.  
USB -> eSATA ->  
Built-in HDD  
This option sets the priority as the USB -> eSATA  
-> built-in hard disk drive.  
eSATA -> Built-in This option sets the priority as the eSATA ->  
HDD -> USB  
builtin hard disk drive -> USB.  
eSATA -> USB ->  
Built-in HDD  
This option sets the priority as the eSATA -> USB  
-> built-in hard disk drive.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-4  
HW Setup  
■ If a boot command is not found on the first detected hard disk drive, the  
system will not boot from next hard disk drive in the list, instead it will  
search for the next device in the Boot Priority list and startup from this  
as appropriate.  
■ Please be aware that some modules may not be displayed.  
USB Memory BIOS Support Type  
This option allows you to set the type of the USB memory to be used as a  
startup device.  
HDD  
FDD  
Sets the USB memory to be the equivalent of a  
hard disk drive (default). With this setting, the  
USB memory device can be used to start the  
computer as though it were a hard disk drive  
based on the hard disk drive settings within both  
the Boot Priority and HDD Priority options  
detailed previously.  
Sets the USB memory to be the equivalent of a  
floppy diskette drive. With this setting, the USB  
memory device can be used to start the  
computer as though it were a floppy diskette  
based on the floppy diskette drive settings within  
the Boot Priority option detailed previously.  
Keyboard  
Wake-up on Keyboard  
When this feature is enabled, and the computer is in Sleep Mode, you can  
turn on the system by pressing any key. However, please be aware that this  
option will only work with the internal keyboard and only when the computer  
is in Sleep Mode.  
Enabled  
Enables the Wake-up on Keyboard function.  
Disabled  
Disables the Wake-up on Keyboard function (Default).  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-5  
 
HW Setup  
CPU  
This function allows you to set the processor's operating mode.  
Dynamic CPU Frequency Mode  
This option allows you to configure the power saving modes associated  
with the processor - the following settings are available:  
Dynamically  
Switchable  
The processor's power consumption and  
automatic clock speed switching functions are  
enabled - in use the processor's operation is  
automatically switched when necessary (default).  
Always High  
Always Low  
The processor's power consumption and  
automatic clock speed switching functions are  
disabled - in use the processor will always run at  
its highest level of power consumption and its  
highest speed.  
The processor's power consumption and  
automatic clock speed switching functions are  
disabled - in use the processor will always run at  
a lower level of power consumption and a low  
speed.  
LAN  
Wake-up on LAN  
This feature lets the computer’s power be turned on when it receives a  
wake-up signal from the LAN.  
Do not install or remove a memory module while Wake-up on LAN is  
enabled.  
■ The Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even when the system  
is off. Leave the AC adaptor connected while using this feature.  
■ To enable it, you must check both the "Allow the device to wake the  
computer" and "Only allow management stations to wake the  
computer" check box within the "Intel Network Connection".  
Power will be automatically turned on when a signal is received from an  
administrator's computer which is connected via a network.  
The following settings can be changed when the Built-in LAN is Enabled.  
Connect the AC adaptor when using the Wake-up on LAN function. The  
battery retention time will be shorter than the times listed in this manual  
when this function is enabled. Refer to the section in chapter 6, Retaining  
data with power off.  
Enabled  
Enables Wake-up on LAN (Default).  
Disables Wake-up on LAN.  
Disabled  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-6  
   
HW Setup  
Built-in LAN  
This feature enables or disables the Built-in LAN.  
Enabled  
Enables Built-in LAN functions (Default).  
Disables Built-in LAN functions.  
Disabled  
Device Config  
Device Configuration  
This option allows you to set how the computer's hardware devices will be  
configured.  
All Devices  
The computer's BIOS will setup and configure all  
devices.  
Setup by OS  
The operating system will setup and configure all  
of the devices that it can control (default).  
USB  
USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation  
You can use this option to enable or disable USB keyboard/mouse legacy  
emulation so that, even if your operating system does not support USB  
devices, you can still use a standard USB mouse and keyboard - to achieve  
this you should set the appropriate option(s) to Enabled.  
Enabled  
Enables the USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation  
function (Default).  
Disabled  
Disables the USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation  
function.  
USB-FDD Legacy Emulation  
Use this option to enable or disable USB floppy diskette drive legacy  
emulation. If your operating system does not support USB, you can still use  
a USB floppy diskette drive by setting the USB-FDD Legacy Emulation  
item to Enabled.  
Enabled  
Enables the USB floppy diskette drive legacy  
emulation function (Default).  
Disabled  
Disables the USB floppy diskette drive legacy  
emulation function.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-7  
   
Chapter 8  
Troubleshooting  
TOSHIBA have designed this computer for durability, however, should  
problems occur you are able to use the procedures detailed in this chapter  
to help determine the cause.  
All users should become familiar with this chapter as knowing what might  
go wrong can help prevent problems from occurring in the first place.  
Problem solving process  
Resolving problems will be much easier if you observe the following  
guidelines:  
■ Stop immediately when you recognize a problem exists as taking further  
action may result in data loss or damage, or you may destroy valuable  
problem related information that can help solve the problem.  
■ Observe what is happening - write down what the system is doing and  
what actions you performed immediately before the problem occurred.  
If you have a printer attached, print a copy of the screen using the  
computer's PRTSC key.  
Please also be aware that the questions and procedures described in this  
chapter are meant only as a guide, they are not definitive problem solving  
techniques. In reality many problems can be solved simply, but a few may  
require help from your reseller, dealer or service provider - if you find you  
need to consult others, be prepared to describe the problem in as much  
detail as possible.  
Preliminary checklist  
You should always consider the simplest solution first - the items detailed in  
this checklist are easy to fix and yet can cause what appears to be a  
serious problem:  
■ Make sure you turn on all peripheral devices before you turn on the  
computer - this includes your printer and any other external device you  
are using.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-1  
       
Troubleshooting  
■ Before you attach an external device you should first turn the computer  
off, then when you turn the computer back on again it will recognize the  
new device.  
■ Make sure all optional accessories are configured properly in the  
computer's setup program and that all required driver software has  
been loaded (please refer to the documentation included with the  
optional accessories for further information on its installation and  
configuration).  
■ Check all cables to ensure they are correctly and firmly attached to the  
computer - loose cables can cause signal errors.  
■ Inspect all connecting cables for loose wires and all connectors for  
loose pins.  
■ Check that your floppy diskette, CD or DVD media is correctly loaded  
and, in the case of a floppy diskette, that its write protect tab is correctly  
set.  
Always try to make detailed notes of your observations and keep them in a  
permanent error log - this will help you to describe your problems to your  
reseller, dealer or service provider. In addition, if a problem recurs, the log  
you have made will help to identify the problem faster.  
Analyzing the problem  
Sometimes the computer will give you clues that can help you identify why  
it is malfunctioning. In view of this you should keep the following questions  
in mind:  
■ Which part of the computer is not operating properly - keyboard, hard  
disk drive, display panel, touch pad, touch pad control buttons - as each  
device will produce different symptoms.  
■ Check the options within the operating system to ensure that its  
configuration is set properly.  
■ What appears on the display? Does it display any messages or random  
characters? If you have a printer attached, print a copy of the screen  
using the PRTSC key and, if possible, look up the messages in the  
documentation included with the computer, software or operating  
system.  
■ Check that all connecting cables are correctly and firmly attached as  
loose cables can cause erroneous or intermittent signals.  
■ Do any indicators light, if so, which ones, what color are they and do  
they stay on or blink? Write down what you see.  
■ Do you hear any beeps, if so how many, are they long or short and are  
they high pitched or low pitched? In addition, is the computer making  
any unusual noises? Write down what you hear.  
Record your observations so you can describe them in detail to your  
reseller, dealer or service provider.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-2  
 
Troubleshooting  
Software  
The problems may be caused by your software or disk. If  
you cannot load a software package, the media may be  
damaged or the program might be corrupted - in these  
instances try loading another copy of the software if  
possible.  
If an error message appears while you are using a software  
package you should refer to the documentation supplied  
with it as this will usually include a problem solving section  
or a summary of error messages.  
Next, you should check any error messages against the  
operating system documentation.  
Hardware  
If you cannot find a software problem, you should then  
check the setup and configuration of your hardware. First  
run through the items in the preliminary checklist as  
described previously then, if you still cannot correct the  
problem, try to identify the source - the next section  
provides checklists for individual components and  
peripherals.  
Before using a peripheral device or application software that is not an  
authorized Toshiba part or product, make sure the device or software can  
be used with your computer. Use of incompatible devices may cause injury  
or may damage your computer.  
Hardware and system checklist  
This section discusses problems caused by your computer’s hardware or  
attached peripherals. Basic problems may occur in the following areas:  
■ System start-up  
■ Self test  
■ Power  
■ Pointing Device  
■ Fingerprint Sensor  
■ USB device  
■ Password  
■ Keyboard  
■ eSATA device  
■ Additional memory module  
■ Sound system  
■ Volume control dial  
■ External monitor  
■ LAN  
■ Internal display panel  
■ Hard disk drive  
■ DVD Super Multi drive  
■ USB floppy diskette drive  
■ ExpressCard  
■ Wireless LAN  
■ Bluetooth  
■ Smart Card  
■ SD/SDHC memory card  
■ Recovery Discs  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-3  
   
Troubleshooting  
System start-up  
When the computer does not start properly, check the following items:  
■ Self Test  
■ Power Sources  
■ Power-on Password  
Self test  
While booting up the computer, self test is executed automatically and the  
TOSHIBAlogo is displayed on the screen.  
This message remains on the screen for a few seconds.  
If the self test is successful, the computer tries to load the operating system  
according to how the Boot Priority option is set within the TOSHIBA HW  
Setup program.  
If any of the following conditions are present, the self test has failed:  
■ The computer stops and does not proceed to display information or  
messages except for the TOSHIBA logo.  
■ Random characters appear on the screen and the system does not  
function normally.  
■ The screen displays an error message.  
In these instances, turn off the computer, check all cable connections and  
then restart it - if the self test fails again, contact your reseller, dealer or  
service provider.  
Power  
When the computer is not plugged into an AC power outlet, the battery  
pack is the primary power source. However, your computer also has a  
number of other power resources, including an intelligent power supply and  
a Real Time Clock (RTC) battery, all of which are interrelated with any one  
having the ability to produce apparent power problems.  
This section provides checklists for AC power and the battery. If you cannot  
resolve a problem after following them, the cause may lie with another  
power related resource - in such an instance you should contact your  
reseller, dealer or service provider.  
User’s Manual  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Troubleshooting  
Overheating power down  
If the processor's temperature reaches an unacceptably high level with  
either setting, the computer will automatically shuts down to prevent any  
damage - in this instance all unsaved data in memory will be lost.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Computer shuts down Leave the computer off until the DC IN indicator  
and DC IN indicator  
stops blinking.  
blinks orange  
It is recommended to leave the computer off until the interior reaches room  
temperature even though the DC IN indicator stops blinking.  
If the computer has reached room temperature  
and it still does not start, or if it starts but shuts  
down quickly, contact your reseller, dealer or  
service provider.  
Computer shuts down This indicates a problem with the heat dispersal  
and its DC IN indicator system - you should contact your reseller, dealer  
is flashing green  
or service provider.  
AC power  
If you have trouble turning on the computer with the AC adaptor connected  
you should check the status of the DC IN indicator. Please refer to Chapter  
6, Power and Power-Up Modes for further information.  
Problem  
Procedure  
AC adaptor doesn’t  
power the computer  
Check the connections to make sure that the  
power cord/adaptor is firmly connected to the  
(DC IN indicator does computer and a working power outlet.  
not glow green)  
Check the condition of the cord and terminals. If  
the cord is frayed or damaged it should be  
replaced, while if the terminals are soiled, they  
should be cleaned with a clean cotton cloth.  
If the AC adaptor still does not power the  
computer, you should contact your reseller,  
dealer or service provider.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-5  
   
Troubleshooting  
Battery  
If you suspect a problem with the battery, you should check the status of  
the DC IN indicator as well as the Battery indicator. Please refer to Chapter  
6, Power and Power-Up Modes for more information on these indicators,  
together with general battery operation.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Battery doesn’t power The battery may be discharged - connect the AC  
the computer adaptor to recharge the battery.  
Battery doesn’t charge If the battery is completely discharged, it will not  
when the AC adaptor is begin charging immediately, in these instances  
attached (Battery  
you should wait a few minutes before trying again.  
indicator does not glow If the battery still does not charge, you should  
orange).  
check that the power outlet the AC adaptor is  
connected to is supplying power - this can be  
tested by plugging another appliance into it.  
Check whether the battery is hot or cold to the  
touch - if so, it will not charge properly and should  
be allowed to reach room temperature before  
you try again.  
Unplug the AC adaptor and remove the battery to  
make sure its connecting terminals are clean - if  
necessary wipe them with a soft dry cloth lightly  
dipped in alcohol.  
Connect the AC adaptor and replace the battery,  
taking care to ensure that it is securely seated in  
the computer.  
Check the Battery indicator - if it does not glow,  
allow the computer to charge the battery for at  
least twenty minutes. If the Battery indicator  
starts to glow after this period, allow the battery  
to continue to charge for at least another twenty  
minutes before turning on the computer.  
However, if the indicator still does not glow, the  
battery may be at the end of its operating life and  
should be replaced. However, if you do not  
believe the battery is at the end of its operating  
life, you should speak to your reseller, dealer or  
service provider.  
Battery doesn’t power If you frequently recharge a partially charged  
the computer as long as battery, the battery might not charge to its full  
expected  
potential - in these instances you should fully  
discharge the battery and then attempt to charge  
it again.  
Check the Power saver option under Select a  
power plan in the Power Options.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-6  
 
Troubleshooting  
Real Time Clock  
Problem  
Procedure  
The following message The charge in the Real Time Clock (RTC) battery  
is Displayed on the  
screen:  
has run out - you will need to set the date and  
time in the BIOS setup application by using the  
following steps:  
RTC battery is  
low or CMOS  
checksum is  
1. Switch on your computer while pressing the  
Esc key.  
inconsistent.  
Press [F1] key to  
set Date/Time.  
2. The BIOS Setup screen is displayed.  
3. Press the F1 key - the BIOS setup application  
will load.  
4. Set the date in the System Date field.  
5. Set the time in the System Time field.  
6. Press the END key - a confirmation message  
will be displayed.  
7. Press the Y key - the BIOS setup application  
will end and the computer will restart.  
Password  
Problem  
Procedure  
Cannot enter password Please refer to the TOSHIBA Password Utility  
section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up  
Modes for further information.  
Keyboard  
Keyboard problems can be caused by the setup and configuration of the  
computer - please refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard for further information.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Some letter keys  
produce numbers  
Check that the numeric keypad overlay is not  
activated - press the FN + F11 hot key and try  
typing again.  
Output to screen is  
garbled  
Please refer to your software's documentation to  
ensure that its is not remapping the keyboard in  
any way (remapping involves changing or  
reassigning the function of each key).  
If you are still unable to use the keyboard, you  
should contact your reseller, dealer or service  
provider.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-7  
       
Troubleshooting  
Internal display panel  
Apparent computer's display panel problems may be related to the  
computer's setup and configuration - please refer to Chapter 7, HW Setup,  
for further information.  
Problem  
Procedure  
No display  
Press the FN + F5 hot keys to adjust the display  
priority, and to make sure it is not set for output to  
an external monitor.  
Markings appear on the These marks may have come from contact with  
computer's display  
panel.  
the keyboard and Touch Pad while the display  
panel has been closed. You should try to remove  
the marks by gently wiping the display panel with  
a clean dry cloth or, if this fails, with a good  
quality LCD screen cleaner. In this latter instance  
you should always follow the instructions with the  
screen cleaner and always ensure you let the  
display panel dry properly before closing it.  
Problems above remain You should initially refer to the documentation  
unresolved or other  
problems occur  
supplied with you software to determine if it is  
this that is causing the problems. Alternatively  
you may wish to run the TOSHIBA PC  
Diagnostic Tool to check the general operation  
of the computer.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
Hard disk drive  
Problem  
Procedure  
Computer does not boot Check to see whether there is a floppy diskette in  
from hard disk drive  
the floppy diskette drive or a CD-ROM/DVD-  
ROM in the optical disc drive - if so remove it and  
try to start the computer again.  
If this has no effect, check the Boot Priority  
setting within the TOSHIBA HW Setup utility -  
please refer to the Boot Priority section in  
Chapter 7, HW Setup for further information.  
Please refer to your operating system  
documentation in order to determine whether  
there is a problem with any of the operating  
system files or settings.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-8  
   
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Procedure  
Slow performance  
The files on the hard disk drive may be  
fragmented - in this instance you should run the  
disk Defragmentation utility to check the  
condition of your files and the hard disk drive.  
Please refer to the operating system's  
documentation or online Help File for further  
information on operating and using the  
Defragmentation utility.  
As a last resort you should reformat the hard disk  
drive and then reload the operating system and  
all other files and data. If you are still unable to  
resolve the problem, contact your reseller, dealer  
or service provider.  
DVD Super Multi drive  
For more information, refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Problem  
Procedure  
You cannot access  
Make sure the drive’s disc tray is securely  
closed.  
Press gently until it clicks into place.  
a CD/DVD in the drive  
Check whether the drive power is on. If the  
power is off, press the FN + Tab hot key and turn  
on the power.  
Open the disc tray and make sure the CD/DVD is  
properly seated. It should lie flat with the label  
facing up.  
A foreign object in the disc tray could block laser  
light from reading the CD/DVD. Make sure there  
is no obstruction. Remove any foreign object.  
Check whether the CD/DVD is dirty. If it is, wipe it  
with a clean cloth dipped in water or a neutral  
cleaner. Refer to the Media care section in  
Chapter 4 for details on cleaning.  
Some CD/DVDs run  
The software or hardware configuration may be  
correctly, but others do causing a problem. Make sure the hardware  
not  
configuration matches your software’s needs.  
Check the CD/DVD's documentation.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-9  
   
Troubleshooting  
Check the type of CD/DVD you are using. The  
drive supports:  
DVD-ROM: DVD-ROM, DVD-Video  
CD-ROM:  
CD-DA, CD-Text, Photo CD  
(single/multi-session), CD-ROM  
Mode 1, Mode 2, CD-ROM XA  
Mode 2 (Form1, Form2), Enhanced  
CD (CD-EXTRA), Addressing  
Method 2  
Recordable DVD: DVD-R/-R DL, DVD+R/+R DL,  
DVD-RW, DVD+RW, DVD-RAM  
Check the region code on the DVD. It must  
match that on the DVD Super Multi drive. Region  
codes are listed in the Optical disc drives section  
in Chapter 2, The Grand Tour.  
USB floppy diskette drive  
For further information, please refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and  
Options.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Drive does not operate Check the connection between the computer and  
the drive to ensure that it is properly attached.  
Some programs run  
The computer's software or hardware  
correctly but others do configuration may be causing a problem - ensure  
not  
that these configurations match your  
requirements (refer to any relevant  
documentation, for example that supplied with  
any software in use, for further information).  
You cannot access the Try another floppy diskette in the drive - if you are  
external floppy diskette able to access this disk then it indicates the  
drive  
original disk and not the drive is probably causing  
the problem.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-10  
   
Troubleshooting  
ExpressCard  
For further information, please refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and  
Options.  
Problem  
Procedure  
ExpressCard error  
occurs  
Remove the ExpressCard from the computer and  
then reinsert it in order to ensure it is firmly  
connected.  
In the event that the ExpressCard is attached to  
an external peripheral device, ensure that this  
connection is properly made.  
If the problem persists, then you should refer to  
the documentation supplied with your  
ExpressCard for further information.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
SD/SDHC memory card  
For further information, please refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and  
Options.  
Problem  
Procedure  
SD/SDHC memory  
card error occurs  
Remove the SD/SDHC memory card from the  
computer and then reinsert it in order to ensure it  
is firmly connected.  
If the problem persists, then you should refer to  
the documentation supplied with your SD/SDHC  
memory card for further information.  
You cannot write to an Remove the SD/SDHC memory card from the  
SD/SDHC memory  
card  
computer and check to ensure that it is not write  
protected.  
You cannot read a file Check to ensure the required file is actually on  
the SD/SDHC memory card that is inserted into  
the computer.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-11  
     
Troubleshooting  
Smart Card  
For further information, please refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and  
Options.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Smart Card error occurs Remove the Smart Card from the computer,  
make sure to confirm that the card oriented  
correctly and reinsert it in order to ensure it is  
firmly connected.  
If the problem persists, then you should refer to  
the documentation supplied with your Smart  
Card for further information.  
Pointing device  
If you are using a USB mouse, you should also refer to both the USB  
device section in this chapter, and the documentation supplied with your  
mouse.  
Touch Pad  
Problem  
Procedure  
On-screen pointer does In this instance the system might be busy - Try  
not respond to pointing moving the mouse again after waiting a short  
device operation  
while.  
Double-tapping does  
not work  
In this instance, you should initially try changing  
the double-click speed setting within the Mouse  
Control utility.  
1. To access this utility, click Start -> Control Panel  
-> Hardware and Sound -> Mouse  
.
2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click  
the Buttons tab.  
3. Set the double-click speed as required and  
click OK.  
The on-screen pointer In this instance, you should initially try changing  
moves too fast or too  
slow  
the speed setting within the Mouse Control utility.  
1. To access this utility, click Start -> Control  
Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Mouse.  
2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click  
the Pointer Options tab.  
3. Set the pointer speed as required and click  
OK.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-12  
         
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Procedure  
The reaction of Touch Adjust the touch Sensitivity.  
pad is either too  
1. Click Start -> Control Panel -> Hardware  
sensitive or not  
sensitive enough.  
and Sound -> Mouse.  
2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click  
the Advanced tab.  
3. Click the Advanced feature settings...  
button.  
4. Advanced feature settings is displayed.  
5. In the Touch Pad tab, click the Settings...  
button within the Pointer speed and tapping  
settings.  
6. Detailed Touch Pad settings window is  
displayed.  
7. Move the slider bar to adjust the sensitivity in  
the Touch Sensitivity.  
8. Click OK button.  
9. Click the OK button on Advanced feature  
setting screen.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
USB mouse  
Problem  
Procedure  
On-screen pointer does In this instance the system might be busy - Try  
not respond to mouse moving the mouse again after waiting a short  
operation  
while.  
Remove the mouse from the computer and then  
reconnect it to a free USB port it in order to  
ensure it is firmly attached.  
Double-clicking does  
not work  
In this instance, you should initially try changing  
the double-click speed setting within the Mouse  
Control utility.  
1. To access this utility, click Start -> Control  
Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Mouse.  
2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click  
the Buttons tab.  
3. Set the double-click speed as required and  
click OK.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-13  
 
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Procedure  
The on-screen pointer In this instance, you should initially try changing  
moves too fast or too  
slow  
the speed setting within the Mouse Control utility.  
1. To access this utility, click Start -> Control  
Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Mouse.  
2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click  
the Pointer Options tab.  
3. Set the pointer speed as required and click  
OK.  
The on-screen pointer The elements of the mouse responsible for  
moves erratically  
detecting movement might be dirty - please refer  
to the documentation supplied with the mouse for  
instructions on how to clean it.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
Fingerprint Sensor  
Problem  
Procedure  
Reading of the  
fingerprint was not  
successful.  
In this instance you should try the fingerprint  
reading operation again using the correct finger  
position - please refer to Using the Fingerprint  
Sensor in Chapter 4, Operating Basics for further  
information.  
Alternatively, you should try the recognition  
process again using another enrolled finger.  
The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes  
the unique characteristics in a fingerprint.  
However, there may be instances where certain  
users are unable to register their fingerprints due  
to insufficient unique characteristics in their  
fingerprints.  
The recognition success rate may differ from  
user to user.  
The fingerprint cannot In this instance you should try the recognition  
be read due to injuries process again using another enrolled finger.  
to the finger.  
However, if fingerprints from all the enrolled  
fingers cannot be read, you should instead log  
into the computer by using the keyboard to input  
the password.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-14  
   
Troubleshooting  
USB device  
In addition to the information in this section, please also refer to the  
documentation supplied with your USB device.  
Problem  
Procedure  
USB device does not  
work  
Remove the USB device from the computer and  
then reconnect it to a free port it in order to  
ensure it is firmly attached.  
Ensure that any required USB device drivers are  
properly installed - to achieve this you should  
refer to both the device documentation and the  
operating system documentation.  
If you are using an operating system that does  
not support USB, you are still able to use a USB  
mouse and/or USB keyboard by setting the USB  
KB/Mouse Emulation option within the  
TOSHIBA HW Setup utility to Enabled.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
USB Sleep and Charge function  
For more information and settings, please refer to the Using the TOSHIBA  
USB Sleep and Charge Utility section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Problem  
Procedure  
I cannot use the "USB USB Sleep and Charge function may be  
Sleep and Charge  
function".  
disabled.  
Select the "Group 1" check box in the TOSHIBA  
Sleep and Charge utility to enable this function.  
When there is a current overflow of the external  
device connected to the compatible port, USB  
bus power (DC5V) supply may be stopped for  
safety reasons. When this happens, disconnect  
an external device if some external devices are  
connected. After that, turn the power of the  
computer ON/OFF to restore the function. If this  
function can not be still used even if only one  
external device is connected, stop using the  
external device because its current is over the  
acceptable value of this computer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-15  
     
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Procedure  
Some external devices may not be able to use  
the "USB Sleep and Charge function". In this  
case, please try one or more of the following  
methods.  
■ Select another Mode.  
■ Turn OFF the computer while external  
devices are connected.  
■ Connect external devices after turning OFF of  
the computer.  
If this function can not be still used, change the  
setting to [Disabled] and stop using this function.  
The battery depletes  
quickly even when I  
If USB Sleep and Charge function is enabled, the  
computer's battery will discharge during  
turned OFF the power hibernation or when the computer is turned off.  
of the computer.  
Connect the AC adaptor to the computer or  
disable the USB Sleep and Charge function.  
External devices  
connected to the  
Some external devices may not work when  
connected to a compatible port when if the USB  
compatible ports do not Sleep and Charge function is enabled.  
work when connected  
to a compatible port.  
Reconnect the external device after turning ON  
the computer.  
If the external device still does not work, connect  
device to a USB port, if there is one, that does  
not have the USB Sleep and Charge function-  
compatible icon ( ) or change to disable USB  
Sleep and Charge function.  
The "USB Wakeup  
When USB Sleep and Charge function is  
function" does not work. enabled, the "USB Wakeup function" does not  
work for ports that support the USB Sleep and  
Charge function.  
In that case, use a USB port, if there is one, that  
does not have the USB Sleep and Charge  
function-compatible icon ( ) or change to  
disable USB Sleep and Charge function.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-16  
Troubleshooting  
eSATA device  
In addition to the information in this section, please also refer to the  
documentation supplied with your eSATA device.  
Problem  
Procedure  
eSATA device does  
not work  
Remove the eSATA device from the computer  
and then reconnect it to a free port it in order to  
ensure it is firmly attached.  
A connected eSATA device may not be  
recognized if it is connected to the computer's  
eSATA/USB combo port while the computer is in  
Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode. If this occurs,  
disconnect the eSATA device and then reconnect  
the device while the computer is turned on.  
Ensure that any required eSATA device drivers  
are properly installed - to achieve this you should  
refer to both the device documentation and the  
operating system documentation.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
Additional memory module  
Please also refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options, for further  
information on installing and removing memory modules.  
Problem  
Procedure  
If there is a memory  
In the event the Power indicator flashes when  
malfunction, the Power the computer is turned on, you should first check  
indicator will repeatedly that the installed memory module(s) are  
flash (on for 0.5  
seconds, off for 0.5  
seconds) in the  
compatible with the computer. If there is an error  
with a compatible memory module, there is a  
possibility the memory module is damaged.  
following patterns;  
If you determine that an incompatible module has  
been installed, you should follow the steps as  
detailed below:  
If there is an error in  
only slot A or no  
memory module is  
inserted in Slot A:  
orange twice, then  
green once.  
1. Turn off the computer.  
2. Disconnect the AC adaptor and all peripheral  
devices.  
If there is an error in  
Slot B: orange once,  
then green twice.  
3. Remove the battery pack.  
4. Remove the incompatible memory module.  
5. Install the battery and/or connect the AC  
adaptor.  
If there are errors in  
both Slot A and Slot B:  
orange twice, then  
green twice.  
6. Turn on the computer.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-17  
       
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Procedure  
An error will occur if a Remove the memory module from Slot B and  
memory module is  
inserted into Slot B  
while no memory  
module is inserted in  
Slot A.  
insert it into Slot A.  
Sound system  
In addition to the information in this section, please also refer to the  
documentation supplied with your audio device.  
Problem  
Procedure  
No sound is heard  
Adjust the volume control dial.  
To increase the volume move the volume control  
dial to the left, and to decrease it move the  
volume control dial to the right.  
Check the software volume settings.  
Please check to see if Mute is turned to Off.  
Check to make sure the headphone connection  
is secure.  
Check within the Windows Device Manager  
application to ensure the sound device is  
enabled and that the device is properly working.  
For further information, please refer to  
"Troubleshooting in Windows" section of  
Windows Help and Support.  
Annoying sound is  
heard  
In this instance you may be experiencing  
feedback from either the internal microphone or  
an external microphone connected to the  
computer - please refer to Sound System in  
Chapter 4, Operating Basics for further  
information.  
Volume cannot be adjusted during Windows start  
up or shut down.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-18  
   
Troubleshooting  
Volume control dial  
Problem  
Procedure  
No sound is heard  
Adjust the volume control dial.  
To increase the volume move the volume control  
dial to the left, and to decrease it move the  
volume control dial to the right.  
Turn the volume control dial while verifying the  
volume in order to adjust.  
Annoying sound is  
heard  
Volume cannot be adjusted during Windows start  
up or shut down.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
External monitor  
Please also refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options, and to the  
documentation supplied with your monitor for further information.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Monitor does not turn  
on  
After confirming that the monitor's power switch  
is on, you should check the connections to make  
sure that the power cord/adaptor is firmly  
connected to the monitor and to a working power  
outlet.  
No display  
Try adjusting the contrast and brightness controls  
on the external monitor.  
Press the FN + F5 hot key in order to change the  
display priority and ensure that it is not set for the  
internal display only.  
Check to see if the external monitor is connected.  
When the external monitor is set as the primary  
display device in extended desktop mode, it will  
not display when the computer wakes up from  
Sleep Mode if the external monitor has been  
disconnected while in Sleep Mode.  
To keep this from happening, do not disconnect  
the external monitor while the computer is in  
Sleep or Hibernation Mode.  
Remember to turn off the computer before  
disconnecting the external monitor.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-19  
     
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Procedure  
When the display panel and an external monitor  
are set to clone mode and they are turned off by  
the timer, the display panel or the external  
monitor may not display when turned on again.  
If this occurs, press FN + F5 to re-set the display  
panel and external monitor to clone mode.  
Display error occurs  
Check that the cable connecting the external  
monitor to the computer is firmly attached.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
LAN  
Problem  
Procedure  
Cannot access LAN  
Check for a firm cable connection between the  
LAN jack and the LAN hub.  
Wake-up on LAN does Make sure the AC adaptor is connected. The  
not work  
Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even  
when the system is off.  
If problems persist, consult your LAN  
administrator.  
Wireless LAN  
If the following procedures do not restore LAN access, consult your LAN  
administrator. For more information on wireless communication, refer to  
Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Cannot access  
Wireless LAN  
Make sure the computer's Wireless  
communication switch is set to on.  
Wake-up on Wireless  
LAN does not work  
Make sure the AC adaptor is connected. The  
Wake-up on Wireless LAN function consumes  
power even when the system is off.  
If problems persist, contact your LAN  
administrator.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-20  
       
Troubleshooting  
Bluetooth  
For further information on Bluetooth wireless communication, please refer  
to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Cannot access  
Bluetooth device  
Check to ensure the computer's Wireless  
Communication Switch is set to on.  
Check to ensure the Bluetooth Manager  
application is running on the computer and that  
power to the external Bluetooth device is turned  
on.  
Check to ensure that no optional Bluetooth  
Adaptor is installed in the computer - the built-in  
Bluetooth hardware cannot operate  
simultaneously with another Bluetooth controller.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
Recovery Media  
Problem  
Procedure  
The following message You will see this message if you have previously  
appears when  
executing Recovery  
Media Creator.  
chosen to remove the partition and are trying to  
create "Recovery Media".  
When there is no recovery partition, the  
"The Recovery  
Recovery Media Creator cannot make Recovery  
Media Creator can Media.  
not be launched  
because there is  
no recovery  
However, if you have already created a  
"Recovery Media", you can use it to restore the  
recovery partition.  
partition."  
Simply follow the instructions in Restoring the  
pre-installed software from your created  
Recovery Media section in Chapter1, Getting  
Started.  
You will be directed to select "Restore Original  
Factory Image" from the drop-down menu.  
If you have not created "Recovery Media",  
please contact TOSHIBA support for assistance.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-21  
     
Troubleshooting  
Using Windows XP Mode on your Windows 7 computer  
(available on certain models)  
Your computer supports virtualization technology that enables you to run  
Windows XP-compatible applications on your Windows 7 computer. This  
gives you the flexibility to continue using legacy applications while still  
benefiting from Windows 7 improvements.  
Virtual Windows XP Mode is supported only on systems running Windows  
7 Professional and Windows 7 Ultimate.  
To take advantage of virtual Windows XP Mode, you may need to enable  
the Virtualization Technology setting in your computer's BIOS (Basic  
Input/Output System). To check this setting and enable it if necessary, do  
the following:  
1. Start or restart your computer while pressing the ESC key. The BIOS  
settings screen displays.  
2. Press the F1 key.  
3. Set Virtualization Technology to Enable.  
4. Restart the computer.  
Some models are equipped with a "Virtualization Technology".  
For more information on running Windows XP Mode on your Windows 7  
system, please visit Microsoft Web site at  
www.microsoft.com/windows/virtual-pc.  
TOSHIBA support  
If you require any additional help using your computer or if you are having  
problems operating the computer, you may need to contact TOSHIBA for  
additional technical assistance.  
Before you call  
Some problems you experience may be related to software or the operating  
system so it is important that you investigate other sources of assistance  
first. Before contacting TOSHIBA, try the following:  
■ Review troubleshooting sections in the documentation supplied with  
your software and/or peripheral devices.  
■ If a problem occurs when you are running software applications, consult  
the software documentation for troubleshooting suggestions and  
consider calling the software company's technical support department  
for assistance.  
■ Consult the reseller or dealer from where you purchased your computer  
and/or software - they are your best resource for current information  
and support.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-22  
       
Troubleshooting  
Where to write  
If you are still unable to solve the problem and suspect that it is hardware  
related, write to TOSHIBA at the nearest location listed below:  
Outside of Europe  
Australia  
In Europe  
Germany & Austria  
TOSHIBA Australia Pty. Ltd.  
Information Systems Division  
Building C, 12-24 Talavera Rd,  
TOSHIBA Europe (I.E.) GmbH  
Geschäftsbereich,  
Deutschland-Österreich  
North Ryde, 2113, NSW, Australia. Hammfelddamm 8, D-41460 Neuss,  
Germany  
Canada  
France  
TOSHIBA of Canada Ltd.  
191 McNabb Street, Markham,  
Ontario L3R 8H2  
TOSHIBA Systèms France S.A.  
7, Rue Ampère B.P. 131, 92804  
Puteaux Cedex  
China  
Netherlands  
TOSHIBA Personal Computer &  
Network (Shanghai) Co., Ltd.  
10F, BEA Finance Tower, No.66  
TOSHIBA Information Systems,  
Benelux B.V.  
Rivium Boulevard 41 2909 LK  
Hua Yuan Shi Qiao Road, Pudong, Capelle a/d IJssel  
Shanghai, P.R.China 200120  
Singapore  
Spain  
TOSHIBA Singapore Pte. Ltd.  
438B Alexandra Road #06-01  
Alexandra Technopark Singapore  
119968  
TOSHIBA Information Systems,  
ESPAÑA  
Parque Empresarial San Fernando  
Edificio Europa, 1a, Planta, Escalera  
A 28830 Madrid, España  
United States of America  
United Kingdom  
TOSHIBA America Information  
Systems, Inc.  
9740 Irvine Boulevard Irvine,  
TOSHIBA Information Systems  
(U.K.) Ltd.  
TOSHIBA Court Weybridge  
Business Park Addlestone Road  
Weybridge, Surrey KT15 2UL  
California 92618 USA  
India  
The Rest of Europe  
TOSHIBA India Pvt Ltd.  
TOSHIBA Europe (I.E.) GmbH  
PC Division 6th Floor, DR Gopal Das Geschäftsbereich, Deutschland-  
Bhawan Barakhamba Road, Delhi- Österreich Hammfelddamm 8, D-  
110001, India  
41460 Neuss, Germany  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-23  
Appendix A  
Specifications  
This appendix summarizes the computer’s technical specifications.  
Physical Dimensions  
Refer to User Information Guide about Size.  
Environmental Requirements  
Conditions  
Ambient temperature  
5°C (41°F) to 35°C (95°F)  
Relative humidity  
Operating  
20% to 80%  
(noncondensing)  
Non-operating  
-20°C (-4°F) to 65°C (149°F) 10% to 90%  
(noncondensing)  
Wet-bulb  
26°C maximum  
temperature  
Conditions  
Operating  
Altitude (from sea level)  
-60 to 3,000 meters  
Non-operating  
-60 to 10,000 meters  
maximum  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-1  
       
Specifications  
Power Requirements  
AC adaptor  
100-240 volts AC  
50 or 60 hertz (cycles per second)  
15 V DC  
Computer  
5.0 amperes  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-2  
Appendix B  
Display Controller and Video mode  
Display controller  
The display controller interprets software commands into hardware  
commands that turn particular parts on the screen on or off.  
Due to the display panel's increased resolution, lines may appear broken in  
when displaying images in full-screen text mode.  
The display controller also controls the video mode and uses industry  
standard rules to govern the screen resolution and the maximum number of  
colors that can be displayed at any one time. Therefore, software written for  
a given video mode will run on any computer that supports that mode.  
Video mode  
Video mode settings are configured via the Display Properties dialog.  
To open the Display Properties dialog, click Start -> Control Panel  
-> Appearance and Personalization -> Personalization -> Display  
Settings.  
If you are running some applications (for example a 3D application or video  
playback and so on), you may see some disturbance, flickering or frame  
dropping on your screen.  
If that occurs, adjust the resolution of display, lowering it until the screen is  
displayed properly.  
Disabling Windows AeroTM may also help correct this issue.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-1  
             
Appendix C  
Wireless LAN  
This appendix is intended to help you get your Wireless LAN network up  
and running, with a minimum of parameters.  
Card Specifications  
Form Factor  
Compatibility  
PCI Express Mini Card  
■ IEEE 802.11 Standard for Wireless LANs  
■ Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) certified by the Wi-Fi  
Alliance. The ‘Wi-Fi CERTIFIED’ logo is a  
certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.  
■ Microsoft Windows Networking  
Network Operating  
System  
■ CSMA/CA (Collision Avoidance) with  
Media Access  
Protocol  
Acknowledgment (ACK)  
User’s Manual  
C-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Wireless LAN  
Radio Characteristics  
Radio Characteristics of Wireless LAN module may vary according to:  
■ Country/region where the product was purchased  
■ Type of product  
Wireless communication is often subject to local radio regulations.  
Although Wireless LAN wireless networking products have been designed  
for operation in the license-free 2.4GHz and 5GHz band, local radio  
regulations may impose a number of limitations to the use of wireless  
communication equipment.  
Refer to the “Information sheet” for regulatory information that may apply in  
your country/region.  
■ Band 5GHz (5150-5850 MHz) (Revision a  
Radio  
Frequency  
and n draft 2.0)  
■ Band 2.4GHz (2400-2483.5 MHz) (Revision  
b/g and n draft 2.0)  
The range of the wireless signal is related to the transmit rate of the  
wireless communication. Communications at lower transmit range may  
travel larger distances.  
■ The range of your wireless devices can be affected when the antennas  
are placed near metal surfaces and solid high-density materials.  
■ Range is also impacted due to "obstacles" in the signal path of the radio  
that may either absorb or reflect the radio signal.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-2  
 
Wireless LAN  
Supported Frequency Sub-bands  
Subject to the radio regulations that apply in the countries/regions, your  
Wireless LAN module may support a different set of 5 GHz/2.4 GHz  
channels. Consult your Authorized Wireless LAN or TOSHIBA Sales office  
for information about the radio regulations that apply in the  
countries/regions.  
2.4GHz Band Channels Sets (Wireless IEEE 802.11 Revision b, g and  
n draft 2.0)  
Frequency Range  
2400-2483.5 MHz  
Channel ID  
1
2412  
2417  
2422  
2427  
2432  
2437  
2442  
2447  
2452  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
10  
11  
12  
13  
2457*  
2462  
2
2467*  
2
2472*  
*1 Factory-set default channels  
*2 The band width and the channel which can be used depends on the  
installed wireless LAN module. And the approved channels on using are  
different at each country or region. The channel configuration is managed  
as follows:  
■ For wireless clients that operate in a Wireless LAN Infrastructure, the  
Wireless LAN module will automatically start operation at the channel  
identified by the Wireless LAN Access Point. When roaming between  
different access points the station can dynamically switch to another  
channel if required.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-3  
 
Wireless LAN  
■ In a Wireless LAN Access Point, the Wireless LAN module will use the  
factory-set default channel (printed in bold), unless the LAN  
Administrator selected a different channel when configuring the  
Wireless LAN Access Point device.  
■ For Wireless LAN modules installed in wireless clients that operating in  
a peer-to-peer mode, the module will use the default channel 10.  
5GHz Band Channels Sets (Wireless IEEE 802.11 Revision a and n  
draft 2.0)  
Frequency Range  
5150-5850 MHz  
Channel ID  
1
34  
5170*  
1
36  
5180*  
1
38  
5190*  
1
40  
5200*  
1
42  
5210*  
1
44  
5220*  
1
46  
5230*  
1
48  
5240*  
1
52  
5260*  
1
56  
5280*  
1
60  
5300*  
1
64  
5320*  
1
100  
104  
108  
112  
116  
120  
124  
128  
132  
136  
140  
149  
5500*  
1
5520*  
1
5540*  
1
5560*  
1
5580*  
1
5600*  
1
5620*  
1
5640*  
1
5660*  
1
5680*  
1
5700*  
1
5745*  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-4  
Wireless LAN  
1
1
1
1
153  
157  
161  
165  
5765*  
5785*  
5805*  
5825*  
*1 The channel which can be used depends on the installed wireless LAN  
module. And the approved channels on using are different at each country  
or region. The channel configuration is managed as follows:  
■ For wireless clients that operate in a Wireless LAN Infrastructure, the  
Wireless LAN module will automatically start operation at the channel  
identified by the Wireless LAN Access Point. When roaming between  
different access points the station can dynamically switch to another  
channel if required.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-5  
Appendix D  
Bluetooth wireless technology  
Interoperability  
Bluetooth Adaptor from TOSHIBA are designed to be interoperable with  
any product with Bluetooth wireless technology that is based on Frequency  
Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS) radio technology, and is compliant to:  
■ Bluetooth Specification Ver. 2.1+EDR, as defined and approved by The  
Bluetooth Special Interest Group.  
■ Logo certification with Bluetooth wireless technology as defined by The  
Bluetooth Special interest Group.  
■ When you use Bluetooth Adaptor from TOSHIBA close to 2.4 GHz  
Wireless LAN devices, Bluetooth transmissions might slow down or  
cause errors. If you detect certain interference while you use Bluetooth  
Adaptor from TOSHIBA, always change the frequency, move your  
computer to the area outside of the interference range of 2.4 GHz  
Wireless LAN devices (40 meters/43.74 yards or more) or stop  
transmitting from your computer. Please visit the following TOSHIBA  
PC product support website.  
■ Bluetooth and Wireless LAN devices operate within the same radio  
frequency range and may interfere with one another. If you use  
Bluetooth and Wireless LAN devices simultaneously, you may  
occasionally experience a less than optimal network performance or  
even lose your network connection.  
If you should experience any such problem, immediately turn off either  
one of your Bluetooth or Wireless LAN.  
Please visit the following TOSHIBA PC product support website.  
TOSHIBA PC product support website.  
In Europe visit  
http://www.toshiba-europe.com/computers/tnt/bluetooth.htm  
In the United States visit  
http://www.pc.support.global.toshiba.com  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-1  
   
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability  
Bluetooth wireless technology and your Health  
The products with Bluetooth wireless technology, like other radio devices,  
emit radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted  
by devices with Bluetooth wireless technology however is far much less  
than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices like for  
example mobile phones.  
Because products with Bluetooth wireless technology operate within the  
guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and  
recommendations, TOSHIBA believes Bluetooth wireless technology is  
safe for use by consumers. These standards and recommendations reflect  
the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of  
panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret  
the extensive research literature.  
In some situations or environments, the use of Bluetooth wireless  
technology may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible  
representatives of the organization. These situations may for example  
include:  
■ Using the equipment with Bluetooth wireless technology on board of  
airplanes, or  
■ In any other environment where the risk of interference to other devices  
or services is perceived or identified as harmful.  
If you are uncertain of the policy that applies on the use of wireless devices  
in a specific organization or environment (e.g. airports), you are  
encouraged to ask for authorization to use the device with Bluetooth  
wireless technology prior to turning on the equipment.  
Regulatory statements  
General  
This product complies with any mandatory product specification in any  
country/region where the product is sold. In addition, the product complies  
with the following.  
European Union (EU) and EFTA  
This equipment complies with the R&TTE directive 1999/5/EC and has  
been provided with the CE mark accordingly.  
Canada - Industry Canada (IC)  
This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not  
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,  
including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.  
The term “IC” before the equipment certification number only signifies that  
the Industry Canada technical specifications were met.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-2  
   
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability  
USA-Federal Communications Commission (FCC)  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a  
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are  
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a  
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate  
radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the  
instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications.  
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a  
particular installation.  
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television  
reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the  
user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the  
following measures:  
■ Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna  
■ Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.  
■ Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which  
the receiver is connected.  
■ Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
TOSHIBA is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused  
by unauthorized modification of the devices included with this Bluetooth  
Adaptor from TOSHIBA, or the substitution or attachment of connecting  
cables and equipment other than specified by TOSHIBA.  
The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification,  
substitution or attachment will be the responsibility of the user.  
Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation  
The radiated output power of the Bluetooth Adaptor from TOSHIBA is far  
below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the  
Bluetooth Adaptor from TOSHIBA shall be used in such a manner that the  
potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized.  
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is  
located or pointed such that it does not emit RF field in excess of Health  
Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable  
from Health Canada's website  
www.hc-sc.gc.ca/ewh-semt/pubs/radiation/99ehd-dhm237/index-eng.php.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-3  
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability  
Taiwan  
Article 12  
Without permission granted by the DGT or NCC, any  
company, enterprise, or user is not allowed to change  
frequency, enhance transmitting power or alter original  
characteristic as well as performance to an approved low  
power radio-frequency devices.  
Article 14  
The low power radio-frequency devices shall not influence  
aircraft security and interfere legal communications; If found,  
the user shall cease operating immediately until no  
interference is achieved.  
The said legal communications means radio communications  
is operated in compliance with the Telecommunications Act.  
The low power radio-frequency devices must be susceptible  
with the interference from legal communications or ISM radio  
wave radiated devices.  
Using Bluetooth Adaptor from TOSHIBA equipment in Japan  
In Japan, the frequency bandwidth of 2,400 - 2,483.5 MHz for second  
generation low-power data communication systems such as this equipment  
overlaps that of mobile object identification systems (premises radio station  
and specified low-power radio station).  
1. Sticker  
Please put the following sticker on computer incorporating this product.  
The frequency bandwidth of this equipment may operate  
within the same range as industrial devices, scientific  
devices, medical devices, microwave ovens, licensed radio  
stations and non-licensed specified low-power radio stations  
for mobile object identification systems (RFID) used in  
factory production lines (Other Radio Stations).  
1. Before using this equipment, ensure that it does not  
interfere with any of the equipment listed above.  
2. If this equipment causes RF interference to other radio  
stations, promptly change the frequency being used,  
change the location of use, or turn off the source of  
emissions.  
3. Contact TOSHIBA Direct PC if you have problems with  
interference caused by this product to Other Radio Stations.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-4  
 
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability  
2. Indication  
The indication shown below appears on this equipment.  
(1) 2.4 : This equipment uses a frequency of 2.4 GHz.  
(2) FH : This equipment uses FH-SS modulation.  
(3) 1: The interference range of this equipment is less than 10 m.  
(4)  
This equipment uses a frequency bandwidth from  
2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz.  
It is impossible to avoid the band of mobile object  
identification systems.  
3. TOSHIBA Direct PC  
Monday - Friday : 10:00-17:00  
Toll Free Tel  
Direct Dial  
FAX  
: 0120-15-1048  
: 03-3457-4850  
: 03-3457-4868  
Device Authorization  
This device obtains the Technical Conditions Compliance Approval, and it  
belongs to the device class of radio equipment of low-power data  
communication system radio station stipulated in the Telecommunications  
Business Law.  
The Name of the radio equipment: EYTFXCS  
JAPAN APPROVALS INSTITUTE FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS  
EQUIPMENT  
Approval Number: D07-0040001  
The following restrictions apply:  
Do not disassemble or modify the device.  
Do not install the embedded wireless module into other device.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-5  
Appendix E  
AC Power Cord and Connectors  
The power cord’s AC input plug must be compatible with the various  
international AC power outlets and the cord must meet the standards for  
the country/region in which it is used. All cords must meet the following  
specifications:  
Length:  
Minimum 1.7 meters  
2
Wire size:  
Minimum 0.75 mm  
Current rating:  
Voltage rating:  
Minimum 2.5 amperes  
125 or 250 VAC  
(depending on country/region’s power standards)  
Certification agencies  
U.S. and Canada: UL listed and CSA certified  
No. 18 AWG, Type SVT or SPT-2  
Australia:  
AS  
Japan:  
DENANHO  
Europe:  
Austria:  
OVE  
Italy:  
IMQ  
Belgium:  
Denmark:  
CEBEC  
DEMKO  
The Netherlands:  
Norway:  
KEMA  
NEMKO  
User’s Manual  
E-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
AC Power Cord and Connectors  
Sweden: SEMKO  
Finland:  
France:  
FIMKO  
LCIE  
Switzerland:  
SEV  
BSI  
Germany:  
VDE  
United Kingdom:  
In Europe, two conductors power cord must be VDE type, H05VVH2-F or  
H03VVH2-F and for three conductors power cord must be VDE type,  
H05VV-F.  
For the United States and Canada, two pin plug configuration must be a 2-  
15P (250V) or 1-15P (125V) and three pin plug configuration must be 6-  
15P (250V) or 5-15P (125V) as designated in the U.S. National Electrical  
code handbook and the Canadian Electrical Code Part II.  
The following illustrations show the plug shapes for the U.S.A. and Canada,  
the United Kingdom, Australia and Europe.  
United Kingdom  
USA  
UL approved  
BS approved  
Australia  
Europe  
Approved by the  
AS approved  
appropriate agency  
Canada  
CSA approved  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-2  
Appendix F  
TOSHIBA Anti-theft Protection Timer  
This feature allows you to set up a timer-activated BIOS password that will  
prevent unauthorised system access in the event of theft.  
When the time limit is exceeded, you are required to provide the Password  
or fingerprint authentication for the BIOS and Hard Disk Drive to gain  
access to the system.  
To set permissions and limits for the TOSHIBA Anti-theft Protection Timer  
please use the TOSHIBA Password Utility.  
The settings can only be activated or modified by a user with supervisor  
authority. If the supervisor password is not set, click on the Set button in  
Supervisor Password from the supervisor tab in TOSHIBA Password  
Utility and set the password on the dialog screen that appears.  
Then, click on the Set button in TOSHIBA Anti-theft Protection Timer.  
Take the following action if the set limit is exceeded.  
■ If the Supervisor Password is registered but the User Password is not,  
enter the Supervisor Password to boot up the computer.  
■ If both the Supervisor Password and the User Password are registered,  
enter either the Supervisor Password, the User Password or the  
fingerprint authentication to boot up the computer.  
■ The limit counts the number of days from the last time Windows is  
logged on till the next time the computer is booted up. The range can  
be set from 1 to 28 days.  
■ Authentication is required if the computer’s clock is significantly  
modified.  
■ If the Supervisor Password is deleted, this function becomes disabled.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-1  
   
Appendix G  
TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor  
The TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor application proactively monitors a  
number of system functions such as power consumption, battery health  
and the system cooling, informing you of significant system conditions. This  
application recognizes the system and individual component serial  
numbers, and will track specific activies related to the computer and their  
usage.  
The collected information includes device operation time and number of  
actuations or status changes (i.e.: number of power button and FN key  
combination uses, AC adaptor, battery, LCD, fan, HDD, sound volume,  
wireless communication switch, TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator and  
USB information), date of initial system use, and also computer and device  
usage (i.e.: power settings, battery temperature and recharging, CPU,  
memory, backlight illumination time, and temperatures for various devices).  
The stored data uses a very small portion of the total hard disk capacity,  
approximately 3MB or less per year.  
This information is used to identify and provide a notification of system  
conditions which may effect the performance of your Toshiba computer. It  
may also be used to help diagnose problems should the computer require  
service by Toshiba or Toshiba's authorized service providers. Additionally,  
Toshiba may also use this information for quality assurance analysis.  
Subject to the use restrictions above, the HDD data logged may be  
transferred to entities located outside of your country or region of residence  
(e.g., European Union). Those countries may or may not have the same  
data protection laws or data protection levels as required by your home  
country or region.  
Once enabled, you may disable the TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor at any  
time by uninstalling the software via Uninstall a program in the Control  
Panel. Doing so will automatically delete all collected information from the  
HDD.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-1  
     
TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor  
The TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor software does not extend or modify  
Toshiba's obligations under its standard limited warranty in any way.  
Toshiba's standard limited warranty terms and limitations apply.  
Starting the TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor  
The TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor can be started using the following  
methods:  
■ Click Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> PC Health  
Monitor.  
■ Click the icon (  
) in the notification area, then click the "Enable PC  
Health Monitor..." message for the first time you run the  
application and "Run PC Health Monitor..." every time thereafter.  
No matter which method is used, the TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor  
explanation screen will be displayed.  
Clicking Next will display the TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor Software Notice  
& Acceptance screen. Please carefully read the information displayed.  
Selecting Accept and clicking OK will enable the program. By enabling the  
TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor software, you agree with these terms and  
conditions and to the use and sharing of the collected information. Once  
the program is enabled, the TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor screen is  
displayed, and the program will begin monitoring system functions and  
collecting information.  
If a TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor message is displayed.  
A message will be displayed if any changes which may interfere with the  
operation of the program are detected. Follow the instructions displayed on  
screen in the message. However, if the following special message is  
displayed, carry out the procedures listed below.  
1. If the "It is possible that the PC cooling performance  
has decreased. Please click [OK] to run the TOSHIBA  
Cooling Performance Diagnostic Tool to check the  
cooling performance of your PC." message is displayed, click  
OK to start the "TOSHIBA Cooling Performance Diagnostic Tool".  
2. If the "It is possible that the PC cooling performance  
has decreased. Please clean the cooling module  
according to the instructions in your PC User's  
Guide." message is displayed after running the "TOSHIBA Cooling  
Performance Diagnostic Tool", the cooling module requires cleaning.  
Refer to the Cleaning the cooling module section, in this chapter.  
3. After cleaning the cooling module, run the "TOSHIBA Cooling  
Performance Diagnostic Tool" again.  
Click Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> Cooling  
Performance Diagnostic Tool.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-2  
   
TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor  
4. If the "Please click [OK] to run the TOSHIBA Cooling  
Performance Diagnostic Tool to check the cooling  
performance of your PC." message is still displayed after running  
the "TOSHIBA Cooling Performance Diagnostic Tool" in step 3, it is  
recommended you turn off the computer and contact TOSHIBA support.  
Cleaning the cooling module  
This section explains how to clean the cooling module.  
If you use the computer for a long period, the inside of the computer may  
become hot. Always allow the computer to cool to room temperature  
before you clean the cooling module.  
To clean the cooling module, follow the steps detailed below:  
1. Shut down the computer - make sure the Power indicator is off (refer to  
the Turning off the power section in Chapter 1, Getting Started if  
required).  
2. Remove the AC adaptor and all cables and peripherals connected to  
the computer.  
3. Close the display panel and turn the computer upside down.  
4. Remove the battery pack (refer to the Replacing the battery pack  
section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes, if required).  
5. Loosen the one screw securing the Cooling module cover.  
Use a point size 0 Phillips screwdriver.  
6. Slide your fingernail or a thin object under the cover and lift it off.  
Cooling module  
cover  
Screw  
Figure G-1 Removing the cooling module cover  
7. Lift the plastic film and clean the cooling module using a vacuum  
cleaner or other cleaning tool.  
Do not use a ball pen, cotton swap or similar to remove dust. If these touch  
the inside of the computer, it could be damaged or become clogged,  
leading to further problems.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-3  
 
TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor  
Plastic film  
Figure G-2 Lift the plastic film  
8. Seat the Cooling module cover back into place on the computer to  
reattach.  
9. Secure the Cooling module cover with one screw.  
10. Install the battery pack (refer to the Replacing the battery pack section  
in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes, if required).  
11. Turn your computer over.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-4  
Appendix H  
Legal Footnotes  
This chapter states the Legal Footnotes information applicable to TOSHIBA  
computers. In the text in this manual, *XX is used to show which Legal  
Footnotes description is related to TOSHIBA computers.  
Description(s) related to this computer are marked with a blue *XX in this  
manual. Clicking on *XX will display the related description.  
Non-applicable Icons*1  
Certain computer chassis are designed to accommodate all possible  
configurations for an entire product series.  
Your selected model may not have all the features and specifications  
corresponding to all of the icons or switches shown on the computer  
chassis, unless you have selected all those features.  
CPU*2  
Central Processing Unit ("CPU") Performance Legal Footnotes.  
CPU performance in your computer product may vary from specifications  
under the following conditions:  
■ use of certain external peripheral products  
■ use if battery power instead of AC power  
■ use of certain multimedia, computer generated graphics or video  
applications  
■ use of standard telephone lines or low speed network connections  
■ use of complex modeling software, such as high end computer aided  
design applications  
■ use of several applications or functionalities simultaneously  
■ use of computer in areas with low air pressure (high altitude >1,000  
meters or >3,280 feet above sea level)  
User’s Manual  
H-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Legal Footnotes  
■ use of computer at temperatures outside the range of 5°C to 30°C (41°F  
to 86°F) or >25°C (77°F) at high altitude (all temperature references are  
approximate and may vary depending on the specific computer model -  
please refer to your computer documentation or visit the Toshiba  
website at www.pcsupport.toshiba.com for details).  
CPU performance may also vary from specifications due to design  
configuration.  
Under some conditions, your computer product may automatically shut-  
down. This is a normal protective feature designed to reduce the risk of lost  
data or damage to the product when used outside recommended  
conditions. To avoid risk of lost data, always make back-up copies of data  
by periodically storing it on an external storage medium. For optimum  
performance, use your computer product only under recommended  
conditions. Read additional restrictions in your PC documentation. Contact  
Toshiba technical service and support, refer to TOSHIBA support section in  
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting for more information.  
64-Bit Computing  
64-bit processors are designed to take advantage of 32 and 64 bit  
computing.  
64-bit computing requires that the following hardware and software  
requirements are met:  
■ 64-bit Operating System  
■ 64-bit CPU, Chipset and BIOS (Basic Input/Output System)  
■ 64-bit Device drivers  
■ 64-bit applications  
Certain device drivers and/or applications may not be compatible with a 64-  
bit CPU and therefore may not function properly. A 32-bit version of the  
operating system is preinstalled on your computer unless explicitly stated  
that the operating system is 64-bit.  
Memory (Main System)*3  
Part of the main system memory may be used by the graphics system for  
graphics performance and therefore reduce the amount of main system  
memory available for other computing activities. The amount of main  
system memory allocated to support graphics may vary depending on the  
graphics system, applications utilized, system memory size and other  
factors. Computers configured with a 32-bit operating system can address  
up to 3GB of system memory. Only computers configured with a 64-bit  
operating system can address 4 GB or more of system memory.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
H-2  
   
Legal Footnotes  
Battery Life*4  
Battery life may vary considerably depending on product model,  
configuration, applications, power management settings and features  
utilized, as well as the natural performance variations produced by the  
design of individual components. Published battery life numbers are  
achieved on select models and configurations tested by Toshiba at the time  
of publication. Recharge time varies depending on usage. Battery may not  
charge while computer is consuming full power.  
After a period of time, the battery will lose its ability to perform at maximum  
capacity and will need to be replaced. This is normal for all batteries. To  
purchase a new battery pack, see the accessories information that shipped  
with your computer.  
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity*5  
One Gigabyte (GB) means 109 = 1,000,000,000 bytes using powers of 10.  
The computer operating system, however, reports storage capacity using  
powers of 2 for the definition of 1 GB = 230 = 1,073,741,824 bytes, and  
therefore shows less storage capacity. Available storage capacity will also  
be less if the product includes one or more pre-installed operating systems,  
such as Microsoft Operating System and/or pre-installed software  
applications, or media content. Actual formatted capacity may vary.  
LCD*6  
Over a period of time, and depending on the usage of the computer, the  
brightness of the LCD screen will deteriorate. This is an intrinsic  
characteristic of LCD technology.  
Maximum brightness is only available when operating in AC power mode.  
Screen will dim when the computer is operated on battery power and you  
may not be able to increase the brightness of the screen.  
Graphics Processor Unit ("GPU")*7  
Graphics processor unit ("GPU") performance may vary depending on  
product model, design configuration, applications, power management  
settings and features utilized. GPU performance is only optimized when  
operating in AC power mode and may decrease considerably when  
operating in battery power mode.  
Total Available Graphics Memory is the total of, as applicable, Dedicated  
Video Memory, System Video Memory and Shared System Memory.  
Shared System Memory will vary depending on system memory size and  
other factors.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
H-3  
               
Legal Footnotes  
Wireless LAN*8  
The transmission speed over the wireless LAN and the distance over which  
wireless LAN can reach may vary depending on surrounding  
electromagnetic environment, obstacles, access point design and  
configuration, and client design and software/hardware configurations.  
The actual transmission speed will be lower than the theoretical maximum  
speed.  
The wireless adapter is based on a draft release version of the IEEE  
802.11n specification and may not be compatible with, or support all  
features (e.g., security) of, certain Wi-Fi equipment.  
USB Sleep and Charge*9  
The "USB Sleep and Charge function" may not work with certain external  
devices even if they are compliant with the USB specification. In those  
cases, turn the power of the computer ON to charge the device.  
Copy Protection*10  
Applicable copy protection standards included in certain media may  
prevent or limit recording or viewing of the media.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
H-4  
         
Glossary  
The terms in this glossary cover topics related to this manual. Alternate  
naming is included for reference.  
Abbreviations  
AC: Alternating current  
ACPI: Advanced Configuration and Power Interface  
AMT: Intel Active Management Technology  
ASCII: American Standard Code for Information Interchange  
BIOS: basic input/output system  
bps: bits per second  
CD: compact disc  
CD-ROM: Compact Disc Read-Only Memory  
CD-RW: Compact Disc-ReWritable  
CMOS: complementary metal-oxide semiconductor  
CPU: central processing unit  
CRT: cathode ray tube  
DC: direct current  
DDC: display data channel  
DDR: double data rate  
DIMM: dual inline memory module  
DVD: digital versatile disc  
DVD-R: Digital Versatile Disc-Recordable  
DVD-RAM: Digital Versatile Disc-Random Access Memory  
DVD-R (Dual Layer): Digital Versatile Disc Recordable Dual Layer  
DVD-ROM: Digital Versatile Disc-Read Only Memory  
DVD-RW: Digital Versatile Disc-ReWritable  
DVD+R (Double Layer): Digital Versatile Disc Recordable Double Layer  
eSATA: external Serial ATA  
FDD: floppy diskette drive  
FIR: fast infrared  
GB: gigabyte  
HDD: hard disk drive  
IDE: integrated drive electronics  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-1  
 
Glossary  
I/O: input/output  
IRQ: interrupt request  
KB: kilobyte  
LAN: local area network  
LCD: liquid crystal display  
LED: light emitting diode  
MB: megabyte  
OCR: optical character recognition (reader)  
PC: personal computer  
PCI: peripheral component interconnect  
RAM: random access memory  
RGB: red, green, and blue  
ROM: read only memory  
RTC: real time clock  
S/P DIF: Sony/Philips Digital Interface Format  
SDRAM: synchronous dynamic random access memory  
SLI: Scalable Link Interface  
SO-DIMM: small-outline dual in line memory module  
SSD: Solid state drive  
TFT: thin-film transistor  
USB: Universal Serial Bus  
UXGA: ultra extended graphics array  
VGA: video graphics array  
WAN: wide area network  
WSXGA: wide super extended graphics array  
WSXGA+: wide super extended graphics array plus  
WUXGA: Wide Ultra Extended Graphics Array  
WXGA: wide extended graphics array  
WXGA+: wide extended graphics array plus  
XGA: extended graphics array  
A
adaptor: A device that provides a compatible connection between two  
units. For example, the computer’s internal display adapter receives  
information from the software and translates it into images on the  
screen. An adapter can take a number of forms, from a  
microprocessor to a simple connector: An intelligent adapter (one  
that is capable of doing some processing) may also be called a  
controller.  
alphanumeric: Keyboard characters including letters, numbers and other  
symbols, such as punctuation marks or mathematical symbols.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-2  
Glossary  
alternating current (AC): Electric current that reverses its direction of flow  
at regular intervals.  
analog signal: A signal whose characteristics such as amplitude and  
frequency vary in proportion to (are an analog of) the value to be  
transmitted. Voice communications are analog signals.  
application: A group of programs that together are used for a specific task  
such as accounting, financial planning, spreadsheets, word  
processing and games.  
ASCII: American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ASCII code  
is a set of 256 binary codes that represent the most commonly used  
letters, numbers, and symbols.  
asynchronous: Lacking regular time relationship. As applied to computer  
communications, asynchronous refers to the method of transmitting  
data that does not require a steady stream of bits to be transmitted  
at regular time intervals.  
B
backup: A copy of a file, usually on a removable disk, kept in case the  
original file is lost or damaged.  
binary: The base two number system composed of zeros and ones (off or  
on), used by most digital computers. The right-most digit of a binary  
number has a value of 1, the next a value of 2, then 4, 8, 16, and so  
on. For example, the binary number 101 has a value of 5. See also  
ASCII.  
BIOS: Basic Input/Output System. The firmware that controls data flow  
within the computer. See also firmware.  
bit: Derived from "binary digit," the basic unit of information used by the  
computer. It is either zero or one. Eight bits is one byte. See also  
byte.  
Bluetooth: A short-range radio technology designed to simplify wireless  
communication among computers, communication devices and the  
Internet.  
board: A circuit board. An internal card containing electronic components,  
called chips, which perform a specific function or increase the  
capabilities of the system.  
boot: Short for bootstrap. A program that starts or restarts the computer.  
The program reads instructions from a storage device into the  
computer’s memory.  
boot disk: See system disk.  
bootable disk: See system disk.  
bps: Bits per second. Typically used to describe the data transmission  
speed of a modem.  
buffer: The portion of the computer’s memory where data is temporarily  
stored. Buffers often compensate for differences in the rate of flow  
from one device to another.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-3  
Glossary  
bus: An interface for transmission of signals, data or electric power.  
byte: The representation of a single character. A sequence of eight bits  
treated as a single unit; also the smallest addressable unit within the  
system.  
C
cache memory: A section of very fast memory in which frequently used  
information is duplicated for quick access. Accessing data from  
cache is faster than accessing it from the computer's main memory.  
See also L1 cache, L2 cache.  
capacity: The amount of data that can be stored on a magnetic storage  
device such as a floppy diskette or hard disk drive. It is usually  
described in terms of kilobytes (KB), where one KB = 1024 bytes,  
megabytes (MB), where one MB = 1024 KB and gigabytes (GB),  
where one GB = 1024 MB.  
CD: An individual compact disc. See also CD-ROM.  
CD-R: A Compact Disc-Recordable disc can be written once and read  
many times. See also CD-ROM.  
CD-ROM: A Compact Disc Read-Only Memory is a high capacity disc that  
can be read from but not written to. The CD-ROM drive uses a laser,  
rather than magnetic heads, to read data from the disc.  
CD-RW: A Compact Disc-ReWritable disc can be rewritten many times.  
See also CD-ROM.  
character: Any letter, number, punctuation mark, or symbol used by the  
computer. Also synonymous with byte.  
chassis: The frame containing the computer.  
chip: A small semiconductor containing computer logic and circuitry for  
processing, memory, input/output functions and controlling other  
chips.  
click: To press and release the pointing device's primary button without  
moving the pointing device. In the Windows operating system, this  
refers to the pointing device's left button, unless otherwise stated.  
See also double-click.  
CMOS: Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor. An electronic circuit  
fabricated on a silicon wafer that requires very little power.  
Integrated circuits implemented in CMOS technology can be tightly  
packaged and are highly reliable.  
cold start: Starting a computer that is currently off (turning on the power).  
COM1, COM2, COM3 and COM4: The names assigned to the serial and  
communication ports.  
commands: Instructions you enter at the terminal keyboard that direct the  
actions of the computer or its peripheral devices.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-4  
Glossary  
compatibility: 1) The ability of one computer to accept and process data  
in the same manner as another computer without modifying the data  
or the media upon which it is being transferred.  
2) the ability of one device to connect to or communicate with  
another system or component.  
components: Elements or parts (of a system) which make up the whole  
(system).  
computer program: A set of instructions written for a computer that  
enable it to achieve a desired result.  
computer system: A combination of hardware, software, firmware, and  
peripheral components assembled to process data into useful  
information.  
configuration: The specific components in your system (such as the  
terminal, printer, and disk drives) and the settings that define how  
your system works. You use the HW Setup program to control your  
system configuration.  
controller: Built-in hardware and software that controls the functions of a  
specific internal or peripheral device (e.g. keyboard controller).  
CPU: Central Processing Unit. The portion of the computer that interprets  
and executes instructions.  
CRT: Cathode Ray Tube. A vacuum tube in which beams projected on a  
fluorescent screen-producing luminous spots. An example is the  
television set.  
cursor: A small, blinking rectangle or line that indicates the current  
position on the display screen.  
D
data: Information that is factual, measurable or statistical that a computer  
can process, store, or retrieve.  
data bits: A data communications parameter controlling the number of bits  
(binary digits) used to make up a byte. If data bits = 7 the computer  
can generate 128 unique characters. If data bits = 8 the computer  
can generate 256 unique characters.  
DC: Direct Current. Electric current that flows in one direction. This type of  
power is usually supplied by batteries.  
default: The parameter value automatically selected by the system when  
you or the program do not provide instructions. Also called a preset  
value.  
delete: To remove data from a disk or other data storage device.  
Synonymous with erase.  
device driver: A program (called a "driver") that permits a computer to  
communicate with a device.  
dialog box: A window that accepts user input to make system settings or  
record other information.  
disable: To turn a computer option off. See also enable.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-5  
Glossary  
disk drive: The device that randomly accesses information on a disk and  
copies it to the computer’s memory. It also writes data from memory  
to the disk. To accomplish these tasks, the unit physically rotates the  
disk at high speed past a read-write head.  
disk storage: Storing data on magnetic disk. Data is arranged on  
concentric tracks much like a phonograph record.  
display: A CRT, LCD, or other image producing device used to view  
computer output.  
documentation: The set of manuals and/or other instructions written for  
the users of a computer system or application. Computer system  
documentation typically includes procedural and tutorial information  
as well as system functions.  
double click: To press and release the pointing device's primary button  
rapidly twice without moving the pointing device. In the Windows  
operating system, this refers to the pointing device's left button,  
unless otherwise stated.  
driver: A software program, generally part of the operating system, that  
controls a specific piece of hardware (frequently a peripheral device  
such as a printer or mouse).  
DVD: An individual digital versatile (or video) disc. See also DVD-ROM.  
DVD-R (+R, -R): A Digital Versatile Disc-Recordable disk can be written  
once and read many times. The DVD-R drive uses a laser to read  
data from the disc.  
DVD-RAM: A Digital Versatile Disc-Random Access Memory is a high-  
capacity, high performance disc that lets you store large volumes of  
data. The DVD-ROM drive uses a laser to read data from the disc.  
DVD-ROM: A Digital Versatile Disc-Read Only Memory is a high capacity,  
high performance disc suitable for play back of video and other  
high-density files. The DVD-ROM drive uses a laser to read data  
from the disc.  
DVD-RW (+RW, -RW): A Digital Versatile Disc-ReWritable disc can be  
rewritten many times.  
E
echo: To send back a reflection of the transmitted data to the sending  
device. You can display the information on the screen, or output it to  
the printer, or both. When a computer receives back data it  
transmitted to a CRT (or other peripheral device) and then transmits  
the data to printer, the printer is said to echo the CRT.  
enable: To turn on a computer option. See also disable.  
erase: See delete.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-6  
Glossary  
escape: 1) A code (ASCII code 27), signaling the computer that what  
follows are commands; used with peripheral devices such as  
printers and modems.  
2) A means of aborting the task currently in progress.  
escape guard time: A time before and after an escape code is sent to the  
modem which distinguishes between escapes that are part of the  
transmitted data, and escapes that are intended as a command to  
the modem.  
execute: To interpret and execute an instruction.  
F
fast infrared: An industry standard that enables cableless infrared serial  
data transfer at speeds of up to 4 Mbps.  
file: A collection of related information; a file can contain data, programs,  
or both.  
fingerprint sensor: The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes the  
unique characteristics in a fingerprint.  
firmware: A set of instructions built into the hardware which controls and  
directs a microprocessor’s activities.  
flash memory: Non-volatile memory that can be written to as well as read.  
Information in flash memory remains whether or not the computer is  
receiving power. This type of memory is used to retain your  
fingerprint data. See also memory. Compare RAM and ROM.  
floppy diskette: A removable disk that stores magnetically encoded data.  
floppy diskette drive (FDD): An electromechanical device that reads and  
writes to floppy diskettes.  
folder: An icon in Windows used to store documents or other folders.  
format: The process of readying a blank disk for its first use. Formatting  
establishes the structure of the disk that the operating system  
expects before it writes files or programs onto the disk.  
function keys: The keys labeled F1 through F12 that tell the computer to  
perform certain functions.  
G
gigabyte (GB): A unit of data storage equal to 1024 megabytes. See also  
megabyte.  
graphics: Drawings, pictures, or other images, such as charts or graphs,  
to present information.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-7  
Glossary  
H
hard disk: A storage device composed of a rigid platter or platters that can  
be magnetically coded with data. Hard disks hold much more  
information than diskettes and are used for long-term storage of  
programs and data. The primary (or only) hard disk in a computer is  
usually fixed, but some computers have secondary hard disks that  
are removable. By default, the hard disk is referred to as drive C.  
hard disk drive (HDD): An electromechanical device that reads and writes  
a hard disk. See also hard disk.  
hardware: The physical electronic and mechanical components of a  
computer system: typically, the computer itself, external disk drives,  
etc. See also software and firmware.  
hertz: A unit of wave frequency that equals one cycle per second.  
host computer: The computer that controls, regulates, and transmits  
information to a device or another computer.  
hot key: The computer’s feature in which certain keys in combination with  
the extended function key, FN, can be used to set system  
parameters, such as speaker volume.  
HW Setup: A TOSHIBA utility that lets you set the parameters for various  
hardware components.  
I
icon: A small graphic image displayed on the screen or in the indicator  
panel. In Windows, an icon represents an object that the user can  
manipulate.  
input: The data or instructions you provide to a computer, communication  
device or other peripheral device from the keyboard or external or  
internal storage devices. The data sent (or output) by the sending  
computer is input for the receiving computer.  
instruction: Statements or commands that specify how to perform a  
particular task.  
interface: 1) Hardware and/or software components of a system used  
specifically to connect one system or device to another.  
2) To physically connect one system or device to another to  
exchange information.  
3) The point of contact between user, the computer, and the  
program, for example, the keyboard or a menu.  
interrupt request: A signal that gives a component access to the  
processor.  
I/O: Input/output. Refers to acceptance and transfer of data to and from a  
computer.  
I/O devices: Equipment used to communicate with the computer and  
transfer data to and from it.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-8  
Glossary  
K
K: Taken from the Greek word kilo, meaning 1000; often used as  
equivalent to 1024, or 2 raised to the 10th power. See also byte and  
kilobyte.  
keyboard: An input device containing switches that are activated by  
manually pressing marked keys. Each keystroke activates a switch  
that transmits a specific code to the computer. For each key, the  
transmitted code is, in turn, representative of the (ASCII) character  
marked on the key.  
kilobyte (KB): A unit of data storage equal to 1024 bytes. See also byte  
and megabyte.  
L
L1 cache: Level one cache. Memory cache built into the processor to help  
improve processing speed. See also cache memory, L2 cache.  
L2 cache: Memory cache installed on the motherboard to help improve  
processing speed. It is slower than L1 cache and faster than main  
memory. See also cache memory, L1 cache.  
LAN: A group of computers or other devices dispersed over a relatively  
limited area and connected by a communications link that enables  
any device to interact with any other on the network.  
Light Emitting Diode (LED): A semiconductor device that emits light  
when a current is applied.  
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD): Liquid crystal sealed between two sheets  
of glass coated with transparent conducting material. The viewing-  
side coating is etched into character forming segments with leads  
that extend to the edge of the glass. Applying a voltage between the  
glass sheets alters the brightness of the liquid crystal.  
M
main board: See motherboard.  
megabyte (MB): A unit of data storage equal to 1024 kilobytes. See also  
kilobyte.  
megahertz: A unit of wave frequency that equals 1 million cycles per  
second. See also hertz.  
memory: Typically refers to the computer’s main memory, where  
programs are run and data is temporarily stored and processed.  
Memory can be volatile and hold data temporarily, such as RAM, or  
it can be nonvolatile and hold data permanently, such as ROM. A  
computer’s main memory is RAM. See RAM, ROM.  
menu: A software interface that displays a list of options on the screen.  
Also called a screen.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-9  
Glossary  
microprocessor: A hardware component contained in a single integrated  
circuit that carries out instructions. Also called the central  
processing unit (CPU), one of the main parts of the computer.  
mode: A method of operation, for example, the Shut Down Mode, Sleep  
Mode or the Hibernation Mode.  
monitor: A device that uses rows and columns of pixels to display  
alphanumeric characters or graphic images. See also CRT.  
motherboard: A name sometimes used to refer to the main printed circuit  
board in processing equipment. It usually contains integrated  
circuits that perform the processor’s basic functions and provides  
connectors for adding other boards that perform special functions.  
MP3: An audio compression standard that enables high-quality  
transmission and real-time playback of sound files.  
N
network: A collection of computers and associated devices that are  
connected by communications facilities. A network allows you to  
share data and peripheral devices, such as printers, with other  
users and to exchange electronic mail.  
non-system disk: A disk for storing programs and data that cannot be  
used to start the computer. Compare system disk.  
nonvolatile memory: Memory that is capable of permanently storing  
information. Turning the computer’s power off does not alter data  
stored in nonvolatile memory.  
numeric keypad overlay: A feature that allows you to use certain keys on  
the keyboard to perform numeric entry, or to control cursor and page  
movement.  
O
OCR: Optical Character Recognition (reader). A technique or device that  
uses laser or visible light to identify characters and input them into a  
storage device.  
online state: A functional state of a peripheral device when it is ready to  
receive or transmit data.  
operating system: A group of programs that controls the basic operation  
of a computer. Operating system functions include interpreting  
programs, creating data files, and controlling the transmission and  
receipt (input/output) of data to and from memory and peripheral  
device.  
output: The results of a computer operation. Output commonly indicates  
data.  
1) printed on paper, 2) displayed at a terminal, 3) sent through the  
serial port of internal modem, or 4) stored on some magnetic media.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-10  
Glossary  
P
parallel: Processes that occur simultaneously. In communications, it  
means the transmission of more than one bit of information at a  
time. On your computer, the parallel port provides a parallel  
communications interface between the computer and an  
appropriate device. Compare serial.  
parity: 1) The symmetrical relationship between two parameter values  
(integers) both of which are either on or off; odd or even; 0 or 1.  
2) In serial communications, an error detection bit that is added to a  
group of data bits making the sum of the bits even or odd. Parity can  
be set to none, odd, or even.  
password: A unique string of characters used to identify a specific user.  
The computer provides various levels of password protection such  
as user and supervisor.  
PCI: Peripheral Component Interconnect. An industry standard 32-bit bus.  
peripheral: Any device, such as a printer or joystick, that is attached to the  
computer and controlled by the computer's CPU.  
pixel: A picture element. The smallest dot that can be made on a display  
or printer. Also called a pel.  
plug and play: A capability with Windows that enables the system to  
automatically recognize connections of external devices and make  
the necessary configurations in the computer.  
pointing device: Any device, such as the Touch Pad or a mouse, that  
enables you to move the cursor on the screen.  
port: The electrical connection through which the computer sends and  
receives data to and from devices or other computers.  
Power Saver: A TOSHIBA utility that lets you set the parameters for  
various power-saving functions.  
program: A set of instructions a computer can execute that enables it to  
achieve a desired result. See also application.  
prompt: A message the computer provides indicating it is ready for or  
requires information or an action from you.  
R
Radio frequency interference (RFI) shield: A metal shield enclosing the  
printed circuit boards of the printer or computer to prevent radio and  
TV interference. All computer equipment generates radio frequency  
signals. The FCC regulates the amount of signals a computing  
device can allow past its shielding. A Class A device is sufficient for  
office use. Class B provides a more stringent classification for home  
equipment use. TOSHIBA portable computers comply with Class B  
computing device regulations.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-11  
Glossary  
Random Access Memory (RAM): Volatile memory that can be written to  
as well as read. Volatile here means that information in RAM is lost  
when you turn off your computer. This type of memory is used for  
your computer’s main memory. See also memory. Compare ROM.  
resolution: A measure of the sharpness of the images that can be  
produced by a printer or displayed on a screen. For a printer,  
resolution is expressed in dots per inch (dpi). For a screen, it is  
expressed as the number of pixels available horizontally and  
vertically.  
restart: Resetting a computer without turning it off (also called "warm  
boot", "soft reset" or "reboot"). See also boot.  
RGB: Red, green, and blue. A device that uses three input signals, each  
activating an electron gun for a primary additive color (red, green,  
and blue) or port for using such a device. See also CRT.  
RJ45: A modular LAN jack.  
Read Only Memory (ROM): Non-volatile memory that can be read but not  
written to. Non-volatile here means that information in ROM remains  
whether or not the computer is receiving power. This type of  
memory is used to store your computer’s BIOS, which is essential  
instructions the computer reads when you start it up. See also  
BIOS, memory. Compare RAM.  
S
S/P DIF: A standard of digital interface for audio.  
SCSI: Small Computer System Interface is an industry standard interface  
for connection of a variety of peripheral devices.  
SD/SDHC memory card: Secure Digital cards are flash memory widely  
used in a variety of digital devices such as digital cameras and  
Personal Digital Assistants.  
serial: Processes that occur one at a time. In communications, it means  
the transmission of one bit at a time sequentially over a single  
channel. On your computer, the serial port provides a serial  
interface between the computer and an appropriate device.  
Compare parallel.  
SIO: Serial Input/Output. The electronic methodology used in serial data  
transmission.  
soft key: Key combinations that emulate keys on the IBM keyboard,  
change some configuration options, stop program execution, and  
access the numeric keypad overlay.  
software: The set of programs, procedures and related documentation  
associated with a computer system. Specifically refers to computer  
programs that direct and control the computer system’s activities.  
See also hardware.  
stop bit: One or more bits of a byte that follow the transmitted character or  
group codes in asynchronous serial communications.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-12  
Glossary  
synchronous: Having a constant time interval between successive bits,  
characters or events.  
system disk: A diskette that contains the operating system files needed to  
start the computer. Any diskette can be formatted as a system disk.  
A system disk is also called a "bootable disk", "boot disk" or a  
"startup disk." Compare non-system disk.  
T
terminal: A typewriter-like keyboard and CRT display screen connected to  
the computer for data input/output.  
TFT display: A liquid crystal display (LCD) made from an array of liquid  
crystal cells using active-matrix technology with thin film transistor  
(TFT) to drive each cell.  
Touch Pad: A pointing device integrated into the TOSHIBA computer palm  
rest.  
U
USB: Universal Serial Bus. This serial interface lets you communicate with  
several devices connected in a chain to a single port on the  
computer.  
V
VGA: Video Graphics Array is an industry standard video adaptor that lets  
you run any popular software.  
volatile memory: Random access memory (RAM) that stores information  
as long as power is supplied to the computer.  
W
warm start: Restarting or resetting a computer without turning it off.  
Wi-Fi: A registered trademark term of the Wi-Fi Alliance that stands for  
Wireless Fidelity, and is another term for the communication  
protocol to permit an Ethernet connection using wireless  
communication components.  
window: A portion of the screen that can display its own application,  
document or dialog box. Often used to mean a Microsoft Windows  
window.  
Wireless LAN: Local Area Network (LAN) through wireless  
communication.  
Wireless WAN: Wide Area Network (WAN) through wireless  
communication.  
write protection: A method for protecting a floppy diskette from accidental  
erasure.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-13  
Index  
automatic power off 3-6  
brightness down 5-4  
brightness up 5-4  
controller B-1  
hinges 2-8  
opening 1-6  
A
AC adaptor 3-3  
DC IN 15V jack 2-4  
additional 3-32  
connecting 1-4  
ASCII characters 5-7  
screen 2-8  
Docking port 2-7  
Documentation list 1-1  
B
Battery  
charging 6-7  
E
extending life 6-9  
indicator 2-11, 6-4  
monitoring capacity 6-8  
real time clock 3-3, 6-6  
save mode 3-7  
Equipment checklist 1-1  
eSATA device 3-29  
eSATA/USB combo port 2-3  
problems 8-17  
ExpressCard 3-16  
inserting 3-16  
types 6-5  
Battery pack 2-6, 3-2  
additional 6-1  
problems 8-11  
removing 3-17  
replacing 6-10  
External monitor 2-2, 3-27  
problems 8-19  
Bluetooth 3-5, 4-29  
Bluetooth Stack for Windows by  
Toshiba 3-12  
problems 8-21  
Boot Priority 7-3  
F
FN + 1 (TOSHIBA Zooming Utility reduce)  
5-5  
FN + 2 (TOSHIBA Zooming Utility enlarge)  
5-5  
FN + ESC (Mute) 5-3  
FN + Enter 5-3  
C
Cleaning the computer 4-33  
Cooling vents 2-2  
FN + F1 (Lock) 5-3  
D
FN + F10 (Arrow mode) 5-3  
FN + F11 (Numeric mode) 5-3  
FN + F12 (ScrLock) 5-3  
FN + F2 (Power Plan) 5-3  
FN + F3 (Sleep) 5-4  
DC IN indicator 2-11, 6-4  
DVD Super Multi drive  
problems 8-9  
using 4-13  
writing 4-17  
FN + F4 (Hibernate) 5-4  
Display 3-4  
User’s Manual  
Index-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TECRA R10  
FN + F5 (Output) 5-4  
FN + F6 (Brightness Down) 5-4  
FN + F7 (Brightness Up) 5-4  
FN + F8 (Wireless) 5-4  
FN + F9 (Touch Pad) 5-4  
FN + Tab (ODD) 5-5  
FN + space (Zoom) 5-5  
Fingerprint Sensor  
TOSHIBA Zooming Utility (reduce) 5-5  
Touch Pad 5-4  
Wireless 5-4  
Zoom 5-5  
I
Indicators 2-11  
K
location 2-8  
problems 8-14  
using 4-2  
Keyboard 5-1  
FN Sticky key 5-5  
Function keys F1...F12 5-2  
Hot keys 5-3  
Floppy diskette care 4-25  
Function keys 5-2  
Windows special keys 5-5  
emulating enhanced keyboard 5-2  
problems 8-7  
G
Graphics controller 3-4  
typewriter keys 5-1  
Keypad overlay 3-7  
H
HDD Protection 4-34  
HW Setup  
Arrow mode 5-6  
Numeric mode 5-6  
Boot priority 7-3  
CPU 7-6  
temporarily using normal keyboard  
(overlay on) 5-7  
LAN 7-6  
USB 7-7  
temporarily using overlay (overlay off)  
5-7  
accessing 7-1  
device config 7-7  
display 7-2  
turning on the overlays 5-6  
L
LAN 3-5, 4-31  
general 7-2  
Link indicator 2-4  
active indicator 2-4  
cable types 4-31  
connecting 4-32  
disconnecting 4-33  
jack 2-4  
keyboard 7-5  
window 7-1  
Hard Disk Drive indicator 2-11  
Hard disk drive 3-3  
automatic power off 3-6  
Heat dispersal 3-7, 4-38  
Hibernation Mode 3-8  
Hot keys 3-6  
problems 8-20  
M
Brightness Down 5-4  
Brightness Up 5-4  
Hibernate 5-4  
Lock 5-3  
Mute 5-3  
ODD 5-5  
Output 5-4  
Power Plan 5-3  
Sleep 5-4  
TOSHIBA Zooming Utility (enlarge) 5-  
5
Media care 4-24  
CD/DVDs 4-24  
Card care 3-22  
Floppy diskettes 4-25  
Memory card care 3-22  
Memory 3-2  
additional 3-32  
installing 3-23  
problems 8-17  
removing 3-25  
User’s Manual  
Index-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TECRA R10  
Moving the computer 4-33  
Self test 8-4  
Smart Card 8-12  
Sound system 8-18  
System start-up 8-4  
TOSHIBA support 8-22  
Touch Pad 8-12  
P
Password  
Starting the computer by 6-17  
Supervisor 6-16  
power on 3-7  
USB device 8-15  
problems 8-7  
user 6-14  
USB floppy diskette drive 8-10  
USB mouse 8-13  
Pointing Device  
Wireless LAN 8-20  
Touch Pad 2-9, 4-1, 8-12  
Touch Pad control buttons 2-9, 4-1  
Touch Pad location 2-8  
using 4-1  
eSATA device 8-17  
Processor 3-1  
R
Power  
Recovery Media 1-15  
Hibernation Mode 1-10  
Shut Down mode (Boot Mode) 1-7  
Sleep Mode 1-8  
problems 8-21  
Recovery hard disk drive 1-14  
Restarting the computer 1-11  
System Auto Off 6-18  
button location 2-8  
conditions 6-1  
indicators 6-4  
panel on/off 3-7, 6-18  
turning off 1-7  
S
SD Card indicator 2-11  
SD/SDHC memory card 3-19  
formatting 3-21  
inserting 3-20  
note 3-19  
turning on 1-7  
problems 8-11  
Problems  
removing 3-21  
AC power 8-5  
Security lock 3-31  
location 2-2  
Sleep Mode  
Additional memory module 8-17  
Analyzing the problem 8-2  
Battery 8-6  
System automatic 3-6  
setting 1-8  
Slice Expansion Battery 3-32, 6-5  
Slice Expansion Battery adaptor 3-32  
Smart Card 3-18  
inserting 3-18  
problems 8-12  
removing 3-19  
Soft keys  
Bluetooth 8-21  
DVD Super Multi drive 8-9  
ExpressCard 8-11  
External monitor 8-19  
Fingerprint Sensor 8-14  
Hard disk drive 8-8  
Hardware and system checklist 8-3  
Internal display panel 8-8  
Keyboard 8-7  
ENTER 5-3  
LAN 8-20  
ScrLock 5-3  
enhanced keyboard 5-2  
Sound system  
Overheating power down 8-5  
Password 8-7  
Pointing device 8-12  
Power 8-4  
Real Time Clock 8-7  
Recovery Media 8-21  
SD/SDHC memory card 8-11  
Stereo speakers 2-9  
headphone jack 2-3  
microphone 2-9  
microphone jack 2-3  
User’s Manual  
Index-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TECRA R10  
problems 8-18  
volume control dial 2-3  
T
TOSHIBA Assist 3-12  
TOSHIBA Assist button 3-6  
TOSHIBA ConfigFree 3-13  
TOSHIBA DVD-RAM Utility 3-13  
TOSHIBA Disc Creator 3-13, 4-22  
TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator 3-32  
TOSHIBA HDD Protection 3-7  
TOSHIBA HDD/SSD Alert 3-14  
TOSHIBA Mic Effect 3-13  
TOSHIBA PC Diagnostic Tool 3-9  
TOSHIBA PC Health Monitor 3-9, G-1  
TOSHIBA Presentation button 3-6  
TOSHIBA SD Memory Boot Utility 3-12  
TOSHIBA SD Memory Card Format 3-12  
TOSHIBA Service Station 3-14  
TOSHIBA USB Sleep and Charge Utility 3-  
15, 4-36  
TOSHIBA Value Added Package 3-9  
TOSHIBA Zooming Utility 3-9  
TOSHIBA eco Utility 3-13  
U
USB FDD Kit 3-28  
USB device  
problems 8-15  
USB floppy diskette drive  
problems 8-10  
V
Video RAM 3-2  
Video mode B-1  
Volume control dial 2-3  
problems 8-19  
W
Web Camera 2-9, 3-5, 4-9  
Windows Mobility Center 3-14  
Wireless LAN 3-5, 4-28  
problems 8-20  
Wireless WAN 3-6  
Wireless communication 4-28  
indicator 2-12, 4-31  
Wireless communication switch 2-5, 4-31  
User’s Manual  
Index-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Taylor Scale TE22OS User Manual
Technika Flat Panel Television LCD19 915 User Manual
Texas Instruments Stereo Amplifier TPA6110A2 MSOP User Manual
Thermo Products Furnace CBD1 100N User Manual
Tiffen Carrying Case F 8 User Manual
Toshiba DVD Player SD K510 User Manual
TRENDnet TV Receiver TEG 448WS User Manual
Tricity Bendix Coffeemaker TCM10 User Manual
Tripp Lite Computer Accessories NB1007GY User Manual
Ultra Products Work Light ULT31352 User Manual